Revelation 13:17 — Word Study

Greek	English	Parsing
καὶ	and	Conjunction
ἵνα	that	Conjunction
μή	no	Particle, negative
τις	one	Indefinite pronoun, nominative, singular
δύνηται	may be able	Verb, present, no voice stated
ἀγοράσαι	to buy	Verb, aorist, active
ἢ	or	Particle
πωλῆσαι	to sell	Verb, aorist, active
εἰ	only	Conditional particle
μὴ	except	Particle, negative
ὁ	the [one]	Article, nominative, singular
ἔχων	having	Verb, present, active
τὸ	the	Article, accusative, singular
χάραγμα	mark —	Noun, accusative, singular
ἢ,	or
τὸ	the	Article, accusative, singular
ὄνομα	name	Noun, accusative, singular
τοῦ	of the	Article, genitive, singular
θηρίου	beast	Noun, genitive, singular
ἢ	or	Particle
τὸν	the	Article, accusative, singular
ἀριθμὸν	number	Noun, accusative, singular
τοῦ	of the	Article, genitive, singular
ὀνόματος	name	Noun, genitive, singular
αὐτοῦ.¶	of it.	Personal pronoun, genitive, singular

	Reference	Text (BSB)
1	Revelation 13:16	And the second beast required all people small and great, rich and poor, free and slave, to receive a mark on their right hand or on their forehead,
2	Revelation 3:12	The one who overcomes I will make a pillar in the temple of My God, and he will never again leave it. Upon him I will write the name of My God, and the name of the city of My God (the new Jerusalem that comes down out of heaven from My God), and My new name.
3	Revelation 14:11	And the smoke of their torment rises forever and ever. Day and night there is no rest for those who worship the beast and its image, or for anyone who receives the mark of its name.”
4	Revelation 17:5	And on her forehead a mysterious name was written: BABYLON THE GREAT, THE MOTHER OF PROSTITUTES AND OF THE ABOMINATIONS OF THE EARTH.
5	Revelation 22:4	They will see His face, and His name will be on their foreheads.

Word	Editions carrying it	Missing from
δύνηται may be able	NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR	Byz
ἢ, or	TR	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, Byz

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίand8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

ἵναhina that G2443 Conjunction ¶

669× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means 'in order that' or 'to', showing purpose or result, as seen in Acts 19:4 and Romans 11:31. It's used to express a goal or outcome. In Ephesians 1:17, it's used to describe a purpose.

Tyndale gloss

in order that/to

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἵνα is primarily a conjunction meaning 'in order that' or 'that,' indicating purpose or intention. It can also function as an adverb of place, meaning 'where' or 'whither.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often introducing clauses that express purpose, such as in Matthew 1:22. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings or usages.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἵνα,

adverb (poët., Hom., al.),

of place, where, whither.

of circumstance, when.

Conjunction,

prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Ac 19:4, Ro 11:31 (?), Ga 2:10, al.);

c. optat. (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph 1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; v. Burton, § 225, Rem., 2);

c. subjc.: after a pres., Mk 4:21, Lk 6:34, Jo 3:15, Ac 2:25,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 186 sqq-.) thought he had found two examples in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have leatned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the second, iva αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. “ iva I. a final Conjunction (for from local direction, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy te mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα pn, that not, lest; it is used…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἵνα (hina) — in order that/to.

ἵνα,

adverb,

I. of Place,

I.1. in that place, there, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.2. elsewhere relative, in which place, where,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵ. ἡ Νίκη (i.e. ἐστίν) [Refs 8th c.BC+] [same place]; ἵν᾽ ἄν with subjunctive, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as indirect interrogative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. b after [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔμαθε ἵ. ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵν᾽ ἕσταμεν χρείας[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. c with Verbs of motion, whither, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. of circumstance, γάμος.., ἵ. χρή at which, when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵ. μὲν ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς.., ἐνταῦθα.. when it was in their power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. ={ἐάν}, uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἵνα

hina

probably from the same as the former part of 1438 (through the

demonstrative idea; compare 3588); in order that (denoting the purpose

or the result):--albeit, because, to the intent (that), lest, so as,

(so) that, (for) to. Compare 3363.

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3363

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἵνα

Cj.

in order that, so that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἵνα hina 663x

that, in order that, Mt. 19:13; Mk. 1:38; Jn. 1:22; 3:15; 17:1; ἵνα μή, that not, lest, Mt. 7:1; in NT equivalent to ὥστε, so that, so as that, Jn. 9:2; also, marking a simple circumstance, the circumstance that, Mt. 10:25; Jn. 4:34; 6:29; 1 Jn. 4:17; 5:3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἵνα Adverb,

of Place,

demonstr. in that place, there, only in Il. 10. 127.

relat., = ὅπου, in which place, where, Hdt., etc.;—so, ἵνα τε Il.; ἵνα περ Hom.:—c. gen., ἵνα γῆς in whatever part of the land, Hdt.; ἔμαθε ἵνα ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, id. Hdt.; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ Soph.

= ὅποι, with Verbs of motion, whither, Od.; ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ ἥκεις Soph.

of circumstance, when, at which, Od.

Final Conjunction, = ὅπως, that, in order that, Lat. ut, Hom.:

with subj.,

after principal tenses of ind., id. Hom., etc.

after historical tenses, in similes, where the aor. refers to any possible time, Od.

after opt. and ἄν, ἔδωκε μένος, ἵνα γένοιτο she gave him vigour, that he might become, Il.

with opt., after historical tenses, Hom., etc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

56%that

that56% · 382×so that40% · 271×other renderings4% · 24×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial8%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 669 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

παρακαλέωI summon, entreaἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide,δίδωμιI offer, give

σύ

λαλέωI speak, sayδιάδίδωμιI offer, give

ἐγώ

δίδωμιI offer, giveὑπέρπερί

ἀλλάbut, except

αὐτόςκόσμοςthe world, univeἐγώ

εἰμίI am, exist

τίςIrgἐγώἱκανόςsufficient, wort

ἵναthat669×

what comes after →

μήNeg

ὁArticle theτὶςεἰς

ὁArticle the

γραφήa writing, passaχαράjoy, gladnessλόγοςa word, speech,

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theσύαὐτός

ἐν

αὐτόςἐγώὅς

εἰμίI am, exist

μετάεἷςoneἅγιοςset apart, holy,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἵνα · 669× in the New Testament

John Mark 1 Corinthians Luke 2 Corinthians Revelation Matthew Romans Ephesians Hebrews 1 John Acts

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

πληρόωI fill, fulfill, complete×παρακαλέωI summon, entreat, admonish, comfort×μηδείςno one, nothing×χαράjoy, gladness×φανερόωI make clear, visible, or manifest×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

מַ֫עַןprep. and conj. for the sake of, on account of, to t23%H4616 · 70 verses מָהrarely מָה־, מַה־, מַה‍ּ, מֶה, מַ‍ּ, מָ—pron. interr18%H4100 · 56 verses

Counted over the 300 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.71c. AD 75–95

ἵνα καὶ τῆς πλινθίνης ἀφανισθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἡ λιθίνη μείνασα παράσχῃ μαθεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα δηλοῦσα καὶ πλινθίνην ὑπʼ αὐτῶν ἀνατεθῆναι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Edg. $1Alexandria259 BC–257 BC

καὶ θεῶν μὴ ὀκνήσῃς διελθὼν εἰς ἐμπόριον καὶ ἀγοράσας, οὐθὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἡμᾶς ἐπικωλύει, ἵνα μὴ ὑστερήσωμεν τῆς ἐργασίας. τὰς δὲ τιμὰς τούτων λαβὲ παρὰ Ἀπολλοφάνους. τὸ γύναιον ἐπίτοκον

P. Lond. 3 p. XXV no. 686 f descr.141 BC–131 BC

vestiges … ἵνα μηθὲν ἐν τούτοις ἀγνοηθῆι … … Ἑρμίαι τῶν διαδόχων καὶ ἐπιμελητῆι, παρὰ Δρύτωνος τοῦ

P.Bour. 11Pathyris89 BC

ἕκαστος τῶν παρὰ σοὶ σιτοποιησάμενος πυροῦ ἀρτάβην μίαν ἐν ἑτοίμωι ἔσται αὐτοῖς ὁ ἄρτος, ἵνα δὲ καὶ κριθὴ ὑπάρξηι ἐπιμε … … ηγησαιἐμμέτρως αἴτησαιἐμμε … … τησαι ἔρρωσο ἔτους

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

μήmē no G3361 Particle · negative ¶

1,060× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Not is a word used to show that something is not true or is not happening, like in phrases that say 'lest' or 'God forbid', as seen in various parts of the New Testament.

Tyndale gloss

not

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μή (mē) is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μή,

subjective negative particle,

used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]

As a neg. adv., not;

with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.

In delib. questions, c. subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mk 12:14, Ro 3:8.

In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mt 10:14,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μή (mē) — not.

μή,

Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)

__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,

__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

μή

me

a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an

absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an

interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an

affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +

lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,

nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in

substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,

3373, 3375, 3378.

see GREEK for 3756

see GREEK for 3362

see GREEK for 3363

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 3373

see GREEK for 3375

see GREEK for 3378

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μή

Neg.prt.

not, lest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μή mē 1x

a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

no.

See NO-AMON.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

No

Or No-A’mon, the home of Amon, the name of Thebes, the ancient capital of what is called the Middle Empire, in Upper or Southern Egypt. “The multitude of No” (Jer. 46:25) is more correctly rendered, as in the Revised Version, “Amon of No”, i.e., No, where Jupiter Amon had his temple. In Ezek. 30:14, 16 it is simply called “No;” but in ver. 15 the name has the Hebrew Hamon prefixed to it, “Hamon No.” This prefix is probably the name simply of the god usually styled Amon or Ammon. In Nah. 3:8 the “populous No” of the Authorized Version is in the Revised Version correctly rendered “No-Amon.”

Smith's Bible Dictionary

[NO-AMON]

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

stirring up; forbidding

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

71%not

not71% · 772×except9% · 95×unless5% · 58×surely not4% · 41×lest3% · 32×otherwise2% · 23×other renderings4% · 48×other renderings1% · 16×

1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial84%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

καίand, even, also,σύἐγώ

ἵναin order that, so th

αὐτόςσύπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώαὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist

εἰCond

αὐτόςυἱόςa son, descendenκαίand, even, also,

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,εἰςδιά

μήno1060×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenσημεῖονa sign, miracle,

ἔχωI have, hold, posses

καίand, even, also,ποιμήνa shepherdβάθοςdepth, a depth,

εἰμίI am, exist

δίδωμιI offer, giveἐνμετά

τὶς

σύὑστερέωI am lacking, faγεννάωI beget, bring f

φοβέωI fear, am terrified

ἀπόὁArticle theμόνοςalone, but, only

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμή · 1,060× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew John 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy Galatians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

εἰCond×ἐάνCond×φοβέωI fear, am terrified×βλέπωI look, see×πότεIrg×μηδέNeg×ἐσθίωI eat×πλανάωI lead astray, deceive×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַלadv. of negation, denying however, not objectively a20%H408 · 273 verses

Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

τιςtis one G5100 Indefinite pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

529× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This pronoun refers to a person or thing in a general sense, as seen in Luke 9:49 and John 11:1. It can mean someone, anyone, or anything. This term is often used to describe an unspecified individual or object.

Amplified meaning

not a single person, anyone

Tyndale gloss

one

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τὶς is an enclitic indefinite pronoun meaning 'someone' or 'something.' It can refer to a certain person or object and appears in both singular and plural forms, such as τινός and τινες. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, including Luke 9:49 and Acts 5:25. It is related to the interrogative pronoun τίς, indicating its flexible use in questions and statements.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τις, neut., τι, gen., τινός,

enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε.

As subst.,

one, a certain one: Lk 9:49, Jo 11:1, Ac 5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Lk 13:1, Ac 15:1, Ro 3:8, al.

someone, anyone, something, anything: Mt 12:29, Mk 9:30, Lk 8:46, Jo 2:25, Ac 17:25, Ro…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τὶς, τὶ. ἘΣ what follows, εἰ καί lays less emphasis upon it; although it is evident that εἰ καί can often be substituted for καὶ ei.” Cf. Herm. Vig. p. 829 sq.; W. 444 (413); Ellic. on Phil. ii. 17; Schmalfeld, Griech. Syntax, § 41; Paley, Grk. Particles, p. 31]. 8. εἰ μή, a. in a conditional protasis, with the same sequence of moods and tenses as the simple εἰ, see 1. above, if not, unless, except, [W. 477 (444) sqq.; B. 345 (297)]: Mt. xxiv. 22; Jn. ix. 33; | xv. 22, 24; Ro. vii. 7, ete. b. it serves, with the entire. following sentence, to limit or correct what has just been said, only, save that, (Lat. nisi quod), [B. 359 (308) ]: Mk. vi. 5; 1 Co. vii. 17 (where Paul by the addition εἰ μὴ ἑκάστῳ κτλ. strives to prevent any one in applying what had been said a little while before, viz. οὐ δεδούλωται . . ἐν τοιούτοις to his own case, from going too far) ; in ironical answers, unless…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τις (indef. pron.), ‘* someone, something’’: P Vat ΑἸ (B.c. 168) (= UPZi. p. 303) πᾶς τις πειρᾶται. . ., P Lond 421° (B.C. 168) (= Selections, p. 10) εἰς πᾶν τι ἐληλυθυῖα διὰ, τὴν τοῦ σίτου τιμήν, ‘having come to the last extremity because of the high price of corn,’’ P Oxy IV. 7421° (B.c. 2) ἐάν τι δύνῃ... δὸς ἐργασίαν, “if you can, give your attention to it’’ (Edd.), 2d. I. 120% (iv/a.D.) τινα ὁρῶντα αἱαυτὸν (/. ἑαυτὸν) ἐν δυστυχίᾳ, ““α man finding himself in adversity,’ 13 ἀποστῖλόν pot τινα ἢ Γοῦνθον ἢ ᾿Αμμώνιον, “send someone to me, either Gunthus or Ammonius” (Edd.). P Oxy VI. 937°" (ili/A.D.) γ]ράψον ἐκεῖ TO kat’ εἶδος ὅτι τι kal τι εἴληφας is translated by the editors ‘* write the list there, that you have received so and so.” They 3) ες remark that it is simpler to take τι καί τι as analogous to τὸ καὶ τό than ‘‘to take τί kal τί as an indirect interrogative, ὅτι being…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τις (tis) — one.

τις,

τι, Indef. pronoun any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions see below):—but τί; τί; Interrog. pronoun who? what?, oxytone in the monosyllable cases, paroxytone in the others:—Dialectal forms: [Refs 5th c.AD+] σις (si se) [Refs 4th c.AD+] σις (with ?? for σ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Thess. κις [Refs], neuter κι in διεκί, ποκκί (which see); neuter plural Doric dialect σά, Boeotian dialect τά, Aeolic dialect dative τίω, τίοισι (see. infr. B). (I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] q[uglide]i-, cf. Latin quis, quid, etc.; for σά, τά, see at {ἄσσα}, σά μά; with τέο (see. infr. B) cf. OSlav. genitive česo)

__A Indef. pronoun τις, τι, genitive Ionic dialect τεο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τευ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect του [Refs 5th c.BC+]; του is rare after [NT+4th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

τὶς

tis

an enclitic indefinite pronoun; some or any person or object:--a (kind

of), any (man, thing, thing at all), certain (thing), divers, he

(every) man, one (X thing), ought, + partly, some (man, -body, -

thing, -what), (+ that no-)thing, what(-soever), X wherewith,

whom(-soever), whose(-soever).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τις, τι

Indef.pr.

any one, some one

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τις tis 534x

enclitic, indefinite pronoun, a certain one, someone, Mt. 12:47; pl. some, certain, several, Lk. 8:2; Acts 9:19; 2 Pet. 3:16; one, a person, Mt. 12:29; Lk. 14:8; Jn. 6:50; combined with the name of an individual, one, Mk. 15:21; as it were in a manner, a kind of, Heb. 10:27; Jas. 1:18; any whatever, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Indef-NSM — Indefinite pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

X-NSM Part of Speech: indefinite pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wun.

See NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

27%anyone

anyone27% · 144×some19% · 102×certain17% · 93×anything9% · 48×any9% · 47×one6% · 34×someone4% · 19×something3% · 18×other renderings7% · 37×

542 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 35 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject66%object20%adverbial9%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 530 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

εἰCond

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὅτιthat, since, bec

δέbut, on the other ha

εἰCondεἰμίI am, existλέγωI say, speak

ἐάνCond

καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakἐγώ

μήNeg

ἵναin order that, sἐάνCondβλέπωI look, see

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςΦαρισαῖοςa Phariseeὁδόςa way, road, jou

τὶςone529×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

γραμματεύςa scribe, town-cμαθητήςa learner, disciἀπό

σύ

λέγωI say, speakπλανάωI lead astray, dἐρωτάωI ask, question,

αὐτός

ἐκὁράωI see, look uponἀπό

ἐκ

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

εἰμίI am, exist

ἐνπλούσιοςrichὑδρωπικόςafflicted with d

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτὶς · 529× in the New Testament

Acts Luke John 1 Corinthians Mark 2 Corinthians Hebrews Matthew 1 Timothy Romans James Revelation

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

εἰCond×ἐάνCond×δοκέωI think, seem, appear, it seems×οὔτεNeg×ΣίμωνSimon×γραμματεύςa scribe, town-clerk, man of learning×τολμάωI dare, endure, am bold×λογίζομαιI reckon, count, decide×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אִישׁman (= vir)36%H376 · 44 verses

Counted over the 121 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 4c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.5c. AD 100

πλήρης εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων, καὶ στέαρ ἀρνῶν καὶ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων οὐ βούλομαι, οὐδ̓ ἂν ἔρχησθε ὀφθῆναί μοι, τίς γὰρ ἐξεζήτησεν ταῦτα ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ὑμῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

Archiv für Papyrusforschung (AfP) 1 (1901), p. 62-65Pathyris124 BC

ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν· μὴ ἐξέστω δὲ τῷ καθόλου ἐπὶ τὴν διαθήκην ταύτην ἄλλῳ τινὶ ἐπέρχεσθαι, εἰ δὲ μὴ ἄκυρον ἔστω καὶ προσαποτεισάτω ὁ ἐπιφέρων ὕστερον … ἄλλον τῆς

P.Cair. Cat. 10364 descr.Pathyris126 BC–102 BC

προγεγραμμένου ἵππου, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαί σοι ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ. ἐὰν δὲ ἐπέλθωμεν ἢ ἄλλος τις ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἥ τʼ ἔφοδος ἄκυρος ἔσται καὶ προσαποτείσομέν σοι χαλκοῦ τάλαντα πέντε.

BGU 6 1260Pathyris102 BC

σημαινομένης ἀρούρης μιᾶς , καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσασθαι Νεχθανοῦπιν καὶ τοὺς τούτου υἱοὺς μηδʼ ἄλλον τινὰ τῶν παρʼ αὐτῶν ἐπὶ τὸν Πετεαρσεμθεία μηδʼ ἐπʼ ἄλλον τινὰ τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ περὶ

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

δύνηταιdunamai may be able G1410 Verb · present · no voice stated · indicative · third person · singular ¶

209× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To be able or have power, as in Matthew 6:24 and Mark 2:7, meaning to have the capability or strength to do something.

Tyndale gloss

be able

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δύναμαι, transliterated as dunamai, means 'to be able' or 'to have power.' It can refer to personal ability, permission, or opportunity. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Matthew 6:24 and Mark 2:7. The lexicons indicate that it can be used with an infinitive or an accusative, but there is some variation in the forms and usages noted in different sources.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δύναμαι, depon.,

[in LXX chiefly for יָכֹל ;]

to be able, have power, whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity: c. inf. (M, Pr., 205; WM, § 44, 3) pres., Mt 6:24, Mk 2:7, Jo 3:2, I Co 10:21, al.; c. inf. aor., Mt 3:9, Mk 1:45, Jo 3:3, 4 Ro 8:39, al.; c. acc., to be able to do something: Mk 9:22, Lk 12:26; II Co 13:8; absol., to be able, capable, powerful: Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δύναμαι, depon. verb, pres. indic. 2 pers. sing. δύνασαι and, acc. to a rarer form occasional in the poets and fr. Polyb. on to be met with in prose writ. also (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 359; [ WH. App. p.168; W.§ 18, 2b.; Veitch 8. v.]), δύνῃ (Mk. ix. 22 sq. L T Tr WH; [Lk. xvi. 2 T WH Tr txt. ]; Rey. ii. 2); impf. ἐδυνάμην and Attic ἠδυνάμην, between which forms the Mss. and editions are almost everywhere divided, [in Mk. vi. 19; xiv. 5; Lk. Vili. 19; xix. 3; Jn. ix. 33; xii. 39 all edd. read 78., so RG in Mt. xxvi. 9; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37; Rev. xiv. 3; on the other hand, in Mt. xxii. 46; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37; Rey. xiv. 3, L T Tr WH all read ἐδ., so T WH in Mt. xxvi. 9; RGin Mt. xxii. 46. Cf. WH. App. p. 162; W. § 12, 1b.; B. 83 (29) ]; fut. δυνήσομαι ; 1 aor. ἠδυνήθην and (in Mk. vii. 24 T WH, after codd. 8B only; in Mt. xvii. 16 cod. B) ἠδυνάσθην (cf. [WH τι. 5. and p. 169]; Kiihner §…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δύναμαι. The following exx. of this common verb may be cited— P Par 471° (c. B.C. 153) (= Selections, p. 22) ἐνβέβληκαν (sc. οἱ θεοὶ) ὑμᾶς εἰς ὕλην μεγάλην Kal οὗ δυνάμεθα ἀποθανεῖν, ““they have cast us into a great forest, where we may possibly die,” P Oxy IV. 743% (B.c. 2) οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην συντυχεῖν ᾿Α., “1 was unable to meet A.,” 26. 7γ4413 (B.c. 1) [ΞΞ Selections, p. 33) πῶς δύναμαί σε ἐπιλαθεῖν ; ‘how can I forget you?”, P Lond 144™ (?i/a.p.) (ΞΞ 11. p. 253) ἵνα δυνηθῇ τὸ παιδάριόν μου ἐλθεῖν mpd[s ple, P Oxy LIT. 47218 (4 A.D. 130) οὐ δύναται γὰρ κεκλέφθαι τὸ μηδ᾽ ἀρχὴν γενόμενον μὴ δυνατὸν δ᾽ εἶναι, ‘for it is impossible for that to have been stolen which neither ever existed at all nor could exist” (Edd.). It takes an ace. ve? (as in Lk 1255) in P Ryl IL. 7758 (A.p. 192) οὐ yap δύναμαι κοσμητείαν. In P Leid {50 (ii/B.c.) ἔφη δύνασθαι τὰ ἔργα πάντα ἐπιτελέσιν ἐν ἡλι (?—was ὀλίγαις…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δύναμαι (dunamai) — be able.

δύνᾰμαι [ῠ],

2nd pers. singular δύνασαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect δύνᾳ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; δύνῃ is subjunctive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural δυνέαται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive δύνωμαι, Ionic dialect 2nd pers. singular δύνηαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect 2nd pers. singular ἐδύνω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἐδυνέατο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future δυνήσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect δυνᾱσοῦμαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐδυνησάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect δυν- [Refs]; subjunctive δυνήσωνται [Refs 7th c.BC+], never in good Attic dialect, falsa lectio in [Refs 4th c.BC+]passive forms, Epic dialect, Ionic dialect, Lyric poetry, ἐδυνάσθην or δυνάσθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect Prose ἐδυνήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect δεδύνημαι [Refs 4th c.BC+] —The double…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δύναμαι

dunamai

of uncertain affinity; to be able or possible:--be able, can (do, +

-not), could, may, might, be possible, be of power.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δύναμαι

v.

I am powerful, am able

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δύναμαι dynamai 210x

to be able, either intrinsically and absolutely, which is the ordinary signification; or, for specific reasons, Mt. 9:15; Lk. 16:2 See ability; (be) able; can.

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δύναμαι decl. in pres. and imperf. like ἵσταμαι Dep.

to be able, capable, strong enough to do, c. inf., Hom., etc.; but the inf. is often omitted, Ζεὺς δύναται ἅπαντα [sc. ποιεῖν] Od.; so also, μέγα δυνάμενος very powerful, mighty, id. Od.; οἱ δυνάμενοι men of power, Eur., Thuc.; δυνάμενος παρά τινι having influence with him, Hdt., etc.

to be able, i. e. to dare or bear to do a thing, οὐδὲ ποιήσειν δύναται Od.; οὐκέτι ἐδύνατο βιοτεύειν Thuc.

with ὡς and a Sup., ὡς ἐδύναντο ἀδηλότατα as secretly as they could, id. Thuc.; ὡς δύναμαι μάλιστα as much as I possibly can, Plat.; or simply ὡς ἐδύνατο in the best way he could, Xen.

to pass for, i. e.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PNI-3S — Verb · present · no voice stated · indicative · third person · singular
present no voice stated indicative — an action in progress.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

a'-b'-l: The Greek dunamai, "to have power," may refer either to inherent strength, or to the absence of in external obstacles, or to what may be allowable or permitted. The Greek ischuo, as in Lu 13:24; Joh 21:6, refers always to the first of the above meanings. The use of the word as an adjective the King James Version of 2Co 3:6, is misleading, and has been properly changed in the Revised Version (British and American) into "sufficient as ministers," i.e. "hath fitted us to be ministers."

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

38%able

able38% · 78×you are able12% · 24×being able10% · 21×he is able5% · 10×you able3% · 7×be able3% · 7×will be able3% · 6×they were able3% · 6×other renderings23% · 48×

207 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 33 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 209 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

καίand, even, also,σύὅτιthat, since, bec

μήNeg

καίand, even, also,ἸησοῦςJesusὥστεso that, therefo

οὐδείςno one, none, nothin

καίand, even, also,οὐκέτιNegἐν

ὁArticle the

πρόςμᾶλλονmore, ratherοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea

πῶς

αὐτόςλέγωI say, speakἤDisj

δύναμαιmay be able209×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

υἱόςa son, descendenθεόςGod, a godπροσέρχομαιI come near, con

αὐτός

θεραπεύωI care for, atteμηδέNegδέωI bind

σῴζωI save, heal

βασιλεύςa king, ruler, eαὐτόςὁArticle the

ἔρχομαιI come, go

πρόςκαίand, even, also,

ἐγώ

καθαρίζωI make cleanποιέωI do, makeνῦνnow, already, at

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδύναμαι · 209× in the New Testament

John Mark Matthew Luke Acts 1 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews James Ephesians Romans 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

οὐNeg×οὐδείςno one, none, nothing×σῴζωI save, heal×πῶς×οὐδέNeg×δουλεύωI am a slave, am subject to, obey×ψυχήthe soul, life, self×πίνωI drink, imbibe×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

יָכֹליָכוֹל be able, have power, prevail, endure67%H3201 · 108 verses

Counted over the 159 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 21c. AD 40

οὗ χάριν τῆς ἀρίστης αὑτοῦ φύσεως οὐκ ἐφθόνησεν οὐσίᾳ μηδὲν ἐξ αὑτῆς ἐχούσῃ καλόν, δυναμένῃ δὲ πάντα γίνεσθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.215c. AD 75–95

Σάρρα δὲ γεννηθέντα τὸν Ἰσμαῆλον ἐκ τῆς δούλης αὐτῆς Ἀγάρης τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἔστεργεν οὐδὲν ἀπολείπουσα τῆς πρὸς ἴδιον υἱὸν εὐνοίας, ἐτρέφετο γὰρ ἐπὶ τῇ τῆς ἡγεμονίας διαδοχῇ, τεκοῦσα δʼ αὐτὴ τὸν Ἴσακον οὐκ ἠξίου παρατρέφεσθαι τούτῳ τὸν Ἰσμαῆλον ὄντα…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.1c. AD 100

Δεῖ οὖν ἡμᾶς περὶ τῶν ἐνεστώτων ἐπιπολὺ ἐραυνῶντας ἐκζητεῖν τὰ δυνάμενα ἡμᾶς σώζειν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Edg. $1Syrien253 BC

τε ἐπιμελόμενος ἵνα ὑγιαίνηις καὶ ἡμῖν γράφων ἐάν τί σοι βούληι γίνεσθαι ὧν ἡμεῖς δυνάμεθα. καλῶς δʼ ἂν ποιήσαις ἀγοράσας ἡμῖν ἵνα ὡς ἂν παραγενώμεθα ἔχωμεν μέλιτος τοῦ βελτίστου

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59330Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)249 BC

φόρωι τοῦ λζ ἔτους, συνφωνήσας Ἡρακλείδης μετὰ Θοτέως αὐτοὶ ἄνευ ἡμῶν διελογίσαντο καὶ οὐ δυνάμεθα παρακολουθῆσαι τί πεποιήκασιν ἕως τοῦ νῦν, οὐδὲ αἰτούμενοι τὸν λόγον ἐτόλμησαν ἡμῖν δοῦναι. καὶ

P.Lond. 2 p. 12-14 no. 401116 BC–111 BC

τι καταπεφύτευκεν ἀμπέλωι, κατεγνωκὼς τῶι γυναῖκας ἡμᾶς εἶναι καὶ ἑτέρωι τόπωι κατοικούσας μὴ εὐχερῶς δύνασθαι ἐπιβαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν σημαινομένην κτῆσιν. Διὸ καταπεφευγυῖαι ἐπὶ σὲ, ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, μεταπεμψάμενον αὐτὸν

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

ἀγοράσαιagorazō to buy G59 Verb · aorist · active · infinitive ¶

30× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To buy or purchase something, often used to describe redemption, as in Matthew 13:44 and Revelation 3:18, where it refers to buying back or redeeming something.

Amplified meaning

purchase, acquire

Tyndale gloss

to buy

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀγοράζω (i.e., *agorazō*) means to buy or purchase, particularly in a market context. It can also imply redeeming or acquiring something at a price. In the New Testament, it appears in various forms, such as in Matthew 21:12 and Revelation 5:9, where it conveys both literal and metaphorical meanings of buying or redeeming.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀγοράζω

(< ἀγορά),

[in LXX chiefly for שׁבר, קנה;]

to frequent the ἀγορά (Hdt., al.).

to buy in the market, purchase (Xen., al.; LXX; in π. very common in deeds of sale, v. MM, VGT, s.v.): absol., Mt 21:12, Mk 11:15; c. acc. rei, Mt 13:44, 46, al.; seq. παρά, c. gen. pers., Re 3:18 (LXX, Polyb.); ἐκ, Mt 27:7; c. gen. pret., Mk 6:37, al.; metaph., I Co 6:20 7:23, II Pe 2:1, Re 5:9 14:3…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀγοράζω ; [impf. ἠγόραζον ; fut. ἀγοράσω] ; 1 aor. ἦγόpaca; Pass., pf. ptep. ἠγορασμένος ; 1 20r. ἠγοράσθην; (ἀγορά); 1. to frequent the market-place. 2. to buy (properly, in the market-place), [Arstph., Xen., al.]; used a. literally: absol.. Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45 [not G T Tr WH]; τί, Mt. xiii. 44, 46; xiv. 15 and parallel pass., Jn. iv. 8; vi.5; with παρά and gen. of the pers. fr. whom, Rev. iii. 18, [Sept., Polyb.]; ἐκ and gen. of price, Mt. xxvii. 7; simple gen. of price, Mk. vi. 37. b. figuratively: Christ is said . to have purchased his disciples i. e. made them, as it were, his private property, 1 Co. vi. 20 [this is commonly understood of God; but cf. Jn. xvii. 9,10]; 1 Co. vii. 23 (with gen. of price added; see τιμή, 1); 2 Pet. ii. 1. He is also said to have bought them for God ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ, by shedding his blood, Rev. v. 9; they, too, are spoken of as…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀγοράζω. The verb (MGr = “‘ buy ”) is common in deeds of sale, e. g. P Lond 882*4 (z.c. 101) (= III. p. 14) ἣν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ O., 26. 1208) (8.6, 97) (=IIT. p. 19). It is used of the purchase of slaves in OG/S 33878 (the will of Attalus II1.—B.c. 133): cf. 1 Cor 650, 7% τιμῆς ἠγοράσθητε (Deissmann LA Z, Ρ. 328). So P Oxy VIII. 11495 ff. (ii/a.p.) ἀ[γο]ράσαι παρὰ Tacap[a]mlwvos ὃν ἔχει δοῦλον Σαραπίωνα, ‘to buy from Tasarapion her slave Sarapion,” a/. Both the verb and the corresponding substantive are found in P Oxy II. 2051). 48, a long letter by a tax-collector of i/A.D., στατῆρας πορφύ[ρ]ας ἀγόρασον . . . ἐὰν εὕρῃς ἀγ[οἱραστὴν τοῦ μέρ[ους] τῆς οἰκίας. For ἀγοραστός, see also P Petr II. 2011. 5,8 (B.C, 252) τοῦ ἀγοραστοῦ = ‘‘(wheat) for sale,” and P Tebt I. 301! (A.p. 123) (= Se/ectrons, p. 78) ἀγοραστὴν παρὰ Θενπετεσούχον . . . οἰκίαν, “the house as purchased from Thenpetesuchus,” αὐ…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀγοράζω (agorazō) — to buy.

ἀγοράζω [ᾰγ],

future άσω [LXX+5th c.BC+]: aorist ἠγόρασα[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἠγόρακα[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, aorist ἠγορασάμην[Refs 4th c.BC+]perfect ἠγόρασμαι (see. below):—passive, aorist ἠγοράσθην[Refs]: perfect ἠγόρασμαι[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—frequent the ἀγορά, αἱ γυναῖκες ἀ. καὶ καπηλεύουσι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; occupy the market-place, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. buy in the market, πωλεῖν ἀ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; generally, buy, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; farm taxes or state-contracts, ὠνὴν ἀ.[Refs]:—middle, buy for oneself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, διάτινος ἀ.[Refs 4th c.BC+]: perfect passive in middle sense, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἠγοράσθαι αὐτοῖς τὸν οἶνον[Refs]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀγοράζω

agorazo

from 58; properly, to go to market, i.e. (by implication) to purchase;

specially, to redeem:--buy, redeem.

see GREEK for 58

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀγοράζω

v.

I buy

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀγοράζω agorazō 30x

to buy; redeem, acquire by a ransom or price paid

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀγοράζω (also in mid. sense); to be in the ἀγορά, frequent it, Hdt.: to occupy the market-place, Thuc.

to buy in the market, buy, purchase, Ar., Xen.; Mid. to buy for oneself, id. Xen., etc.

as a mark of idle fellows, to lounge in the ἀγορά, Thuc.; cf. ἀγοραῖος.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-AAN — Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5658

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

13%buying

buying13% · 4×buy10% · 3×they may buy10% · 3×you were bought6% · 2×having bought6% · 2×redeemed6% · 2×buys6% · 2×do buy6% · 2×other renderings35% · 11×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 18 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb97%adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 30 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

ἔχωI have, hold, poπωλέωI sellαὐτός

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,χιλιάςa thousand

κώμηa village

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,

αὐτός

δέbut, on the othe

λαμβάνωI receive, take

δέbut, on the othe

ἀγοράζωto buy30×

what comes after →

ἑαυτοῦ

βρῶμαfood of any kindτίςIrg

ὁArticle the

ἀγρόςa field, the couθεόςGod, a god

αὐτός

δεσπότηςa lord, master,

ἐν

ὁArticle the

ἀπό

ὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀγοράζω · 30× in the New Testament

Matthew Revelation Luke Mark 1 Corinthians John 2 Peter

Across the New Testament7 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

πωλέωI sell×ἔχωI have, hold, possess×ἀγρόςa field, the country×ἑαυτοῦ×ὅσος×κώμηa village×ἱερόςa temple×ἀπέρχομαιI come or go away from, depart, return×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

שָׁבַרvb. denom. buy grain64%H7666 · 9 verses אֹ֫כֶלfood35%H400 · 5 verses כֶּ֫סֶףsilver, money35%H3701 · 5 verses מִצְרַ֫יִםEgypt, Egyptians28%H4714 · 4 verses

Counted over the 14 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 12.175c. AD 75–95

Ἐνστάσης δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας, καθʼ ἣν ἔμελλεν τὰ τέλη πιπράσκεσθαι τῶν πόλεων, ἠγόραζον οἱ τοῖς ἀξιώμασιν ἐν ταῖς πατρίσιν διαφέροντες.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD

P.Grenf. 2 32Pathyris102 BC

γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἄρουραν α, ὧν αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ τῆς προκειμένης συνγραφῆς, ἣν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Πετεαρσεμθέως τοῦ Πανεβχούνιος πρὸς χαλκοῦ τάλαντα β, τέλος Ασ, γίνονται χαλκοῦ δραχμαὶ Ασ.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

παστοφορίου ἐντὸς τοῦ περιβόλου τοῦ ἐπιβάλλοντος αὐτῶι μέρους τετάρτου, ὧν αἱ γειτνίαι δεδηλῶνται, ὃν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Νεχούτου τοῦ Σχώτου ἱερέως Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης χαλκοῦ Γ, τέλος τ. Παγκράτης.

P.Grenf. 2 36Pathyris96 BC

τὸν μῦν καταβεβρωκέναι τὸν σπόρον. καλῶς ἡμῖν ὦδε, ἢ ἐν Διοσπόλει ἐὰν αἱρῆσθε, πυρὸν ἀγοράσαι ἥκετε. τὰ δʼ ἄλλα χαρίζοισθʼ ἑαυτῶν ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε. ἔρρωται Ὧρος καὶ Πετοσῖρις. ἔρρωσθε.

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

ἢē or G2228 Particle ¶

343× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Or is a word used to show a choice between two things, like in Matthew 5:17 where it's either obey God's law or not. It's also used to compare things, like in Romans 1:21 where it's one thing or another.

Tyndale gloss

or

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἤ (ē) is a particle used to indicate distinction, functioning as a disjunctive 'or' and a comparative 'than.' It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in phrases like 'either...or' and in disjunctive questions. Notably, it can also express comparisons after comparative terms, such as in Matthew 10:15. The entries do not show any significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11);

disjunctive, or;

between single words: Mt 5:17, Mk 6:56, Lk 2:24, Jo 6:19, Ro 1:21, al.;

before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, freq. in interrog. form: Mt 7:4, 9, Mk 12:14, Lk 13:4, Ro 3:29 6:3 9:21, I Co 6:9, 16 9:6, II Co 11:7; ἢ . . . ἤ…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Χριστοῦ (NVWT ΒΗ Targ. Jonath. ad ᾿ς lili. 10), the kingdom of the Messiah, which will be founded by God through the Messiah and over which the Messiah will preside as God’s vicegerent; ἡ Bac. τῶν οὐρανῶν, only in Matthew, but very frequently [some 33 times], the kingdom of heaven, i. e. the kingdom which is of heavenly or divine origin and nature (in rabbin. writ. nown mao is the rule of God, the theocracy viewed universally, not the Messianic kingdom); sometimes simply ἡ βασιλεία : Mt. iv. 23, ete.; Jas. ii. 5; once ἡ Bac. τοῦ Δαυείδ, because it was supposed the Messiah would be one of David’s descendants and a king very like David, Mk. xi. 10; once also ἡ Bac. τοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ θεοῦ, Eph. ν. 5. Relying principally on the prophecies of Daniel — who had declared it to be the purpose of God that, after four vast and mighty kingdoms had succeeded one another and the last of…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἢ μή. The general distinction between οὐ and μή is that οὐ is objective, dealing only with facts, while μή is sudjectize, involving will and thought. But in late Greek μή has encroached very largely upon οὐ, with the result that in the NT οὐ is almost entirely confined to the indicative, while μή monopolizes the other moods (but see I. 5). A few exx. of some of the many uses of μή will make this clear. I. Μή negatives (1) the conjunctive (a) after ἐάν (4v)—P Oxy II. 294%? (A.D. 22) (= Selections, p. 36), where certain men are confined to prison, ἐὰν μή τι πίσωσι τὸν ἀρχιστάτορα δο[ῦν]αι etk(= ἱκ)ανόν, ‘* unless indeed they shall persuade the chief usher to give security,’’ BGU II. 5301” \i/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 61) alav (/. ἐὰν) μὴ ἔλθῃς, κινδυνεύω ἐκστῆvat od ἔχω [κλή]ρου, “if you do not come I run the risk of losing the lot (of land) which I possess ”—a father writes to Selections…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἤ (ē) — or.

ἤ,

Epic dialect also ἠέ (in signification [Refs 4th c.BC+], conjunction with two chief senses, Disj. (or) and comparative (than).

__A DISJUNCTIVE, or, ἐγὼ.. ἢ ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θεόσυτος ἢ βρότειος ἢ κεκραμένη [Refs 4th c.BC+]

__A.2 ἢ.. ἤ either.. or, ἢ νῦν δηθύνοντ᾽ ἢ ὕστερον αὖτις ἰόντα [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.; so ἢ.. ἤτοι.. [Refs 5th c.BC+] is emphasized, later no distinction is implied, [NT+2nd c.BC+]; ἤ repeated any number of times, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι ἢ τεὸν ἢ Αἴαντος ἰὼν γέρας ἢ Ὀδυσῆος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἤ is probably wrongly accented in codices of [Refs 8th c.BC+] adverb [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἤ

e

a primary particle of distinction between two connected terms;

disjunctive, or; comparative, than:--and, but (either), (n-)either,

except it be, (n-)or (else), rather, save, than, that, what, yea.

Often used in connection with other particles. Compare especially

2235, 2260, 2273.

see GREEK for 2235

see GREEK for 2260

see GREEK for 2273

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἤ

Disj.prt.

or, than

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἤ ē 343x

can function as a conj (298x), either, or, Mt. 6:24; after comparatives, and ἄλλος, ἕτερος, expressed or implied, than, Mt. 10:15; 18:8; Acts 17:21; 24:21; intensive after ἀλλά and πρίν, Lk. 12:51; Mt. 1:18; it also serves to point an interrogation, Rom. 3:29

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Particle — Particle
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT PaRTicle, disjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

or: The word is used once for either (1Sa 26:10), and is still in poetic use in this sense; as in, "Without or wave or wind" (Coleridge); "Or the bakke or some bone he breketh in his dzouthe" (Piers Plowman (B), VII, 93; compare Merchant of Venice, III, ii, 65). It is also used with "ever" for before (Ps 90:2; Ecclesiasticus 18:19), which the American Standard Revised Version substitutes in Ec 12:6 (compare 12:1,2); So 6:12; Da 6:24.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

84%or

or84% · 304×than13% · 47×other renderings4% · 13×

364 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial20%object18%subject12%predicate7%verb4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 343 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

σύ

πρόςχείρa handἁμαρτίαa sin

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ὁArticle theκακολογέωI speak evil of,ἤDisj

εἰμίI am, exist

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἀνεκτόςendurable, tolerθεόςGod, a god

αὐτός

πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenβοῦςan ox

ἀδελφόςa brother

ἤDisjὁArticle theἐάνCond

ἤor343×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

μήτηρa motherπόλιςa cityδύο

τίςIrg

πίνωI drink, imbibeεἰμίI am, existλαλέωI speak, say

οὐNeg

οἶδαI know, rememberἀναγινώσκωI readδίδωμιI offer, give

ἐν

φυλακήa watching, guarτίςIrgποῖοςIrg

καίand, even, also, nam

ἰχθύςa fishαἰτέωI ask, request, πρός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἤ · 343× in the New Testament

Matthew 1 Corinthians Luke Acts Mark Romans 2 Corinthians John 1 Peter Galatians James Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἤDisj×τίςIrg×δύο×μήτηρa mother×οἰκίαa house, household×μᾶλλονmore, rather×ἀδελφήa sister×τέκνονa child, descendent, inhabitant×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אוֹor28%H176 · 131 verses אִםconj26%H518 · 123 verses

Counted over the 457 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

πωλῆσαιpōleō to sell G4453 Verb · aorist · active · infinitive ¶

22× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means to sell something, like a merchant selling goods. It appears in Matthew 21:12 and Revelation 13:17, and is used to describe the act of exchanging or bartering something for something else.

Amplified meaning

trade, exchange

Tyndale gloss

to sell

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πωλέω (pōleō) means to sell or barter, derived from a root suggesting trade. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Luke 17:28 and Revelation 13:17, often referring to the act of selling goods or property. The lexicons agree on its primary meaning, with no significant disagreement noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πωλέω, -ῶ,

[in LXX chiefly for מכר;]

to exchange or barter.

to sell: Lk 17:28, Re 13:17; οἱ πωλοῦντες, Mt 21:12 25:9, Mk 11:15, Lk 19:45; c. acc. rei, Mt 13:44 19:21 21:12, Mk 10:21 11:15, Lk 12:33 18:22 22:36, Jo 2:14, 16, Ac 5:1 (sc. αὐτά, αὐτόν), Ac 4:34, 37. Pass., I Co 10:25; c. gen.…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πωλέω, -&; imp. ἐπώλουν; 1 aor. ἐπώλησα ; pres. pass. πωλοῦμαι; (πέλω, πέλομαι, to turn, turn about, [Curtius § 633 p. 470], fr. which [through the noun πωλή; Lod. in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 57 bot.] πωλοῦμαι, Lat. versor, foll. by εἰς with acc. of place, to frequent a place; ef. the Lat. venio and veneo); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 720; prop. to barter, i. 6. to sell: absol. (opp. to ἀγοράζει), Lk. xvii. 28; Rev. xiii. 17; of πωλοῦντες (opp. to of dyopd¢ovres, buyers), sellers, Mt. xxi. 12; xxv.9; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45; with acc. of a thing, Mt. xiii. 44; xix. 21; xxi. 12; Mk. x. 21; xi. 15; Lk. [xii. 33]; xviii. 22; xxii. 36; Jn. ii. 14,16; Acts v.1; supply αὐτόν, Acts iv. 37; αὐτά, ib. 34; pass. 1 Co. x. 25; with a gen. of price added, Mt. x. 29; Lk. xii. 6.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πωλέω. From meaning originally ‘‘put up for sale’’ (sendzfo) πωλέω came to mean simply ‘‘sell” (endo). This later sense, which alone is found in the NT, can be fully illustrated from the papyri, e.g. PSI IV. 3567 (B.c. 253-2) οὐθεὶς οὖν ἐν τοῖς τόποις πωλεῖ πρὸς σῖτον, ἀλλὰ πρὸς ἀργύριον, P Ryl LL. 1138 (Δ.1.133) μόλις πάντα τὰ ἐμαυτοῦ πωλήσας ἐδυνήθην πληρῶσαι, “I was with difficulty able to complete this by selling all my property ” (cf. Mk τοῦ), P Oxy III. 49428 (a Will—A.p. 156) ἐξέστω 80 αὐτῆς πωλεῖν καὶ ὑποτίθεσθαι ἃ ἐὰν aipfrat, ‘‘she shall have the right to ell or mortgage on her own authority whatever she chooses, "ἢ 76. VI. 03219 (late ii/A.D.) τὰ χοιρίδια χωρὶς μοῦ μὴ πώλι, “do not sell the young pigs without me,” P Tebt IT. 4215 (iii/A.p.) (= Se/ections, p. 106) θέλις αὐτὸ πωλῆσαι], πώλησον, ‘if you wish to sell it, sell it,” and P Oxy I. 83} (A.D. 327), where an egg-seller…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πωλέω (pōleō) — to sell.

πωλ-έω,

Ionic dialectimperfect πωλέεσκε [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future -ήσω[Refs 5th c.BC+]; Doric dialect 3rd.pers. plural πωλησεῦντι [Refs 1st c.AD+]: aorist ἐπώλησα [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—passive, future in middle form πωλήσεται [Refs 4th c.BC+] future πεπωλήσεται [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐπωλήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—sell or offer for sale, opposed to ὠνεῖσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to ἀποδίδοσθαι (of the actual sale), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μετ᾽ ἀβακίου καὶ τραπεζίου π. ἑαυτόν sell oneself across the counter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] sold at a high price for exportation to Sardis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πωλέω οὐδενὸς χρήματος refuse to sell it at any price, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ σφῶν αὐτῶν μικροῦ λήμματος π. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἔρωμαι ὁπόσου πωλε; ask what he wants for it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν Ἀσίην πωλῶ πρὸς μύρα[Refs]; π. τινί τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τι πρός τινας [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πωλέω

poleo

probably ultimately from pelomai (to be busy, to trade); to barter (as

a pedlar), i.e. to sell:--sell, whatever is sold.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πωλέω

v.

I sell

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πωλέω pōleō 22x

to sell, Mt. 10:29; 13:44

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πωλέω πωλέω,

to exchange or barter goods, to sell or offer for sale, Hdt., attic; c. gen. pretii, ἐς Σάρδις χρημάτων μεγάλων π. to sell at a high price for exportation to Sardis, Hdt.; ἐπώλεε οὐδενὸς χρήματος refused to sell it at any price, id. Hdt.; ἐρέσθαι ὁπόσου πωλεῖ to ask what he wants for it, Xen.; absol., π. πρός τινα to deal with one, Ar.

π. τέλη to let out the taxes, Lat. locare, Aeschin.

to sell, i. e. give up, betray, Dem.:—of persons, to be bought and sold, Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-AAN — Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5658

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

41%selling

selling41% · 9×do sell18% · 4×having sold5% · 1×sold5% · 1×being sold5% · 1×sell5% · 1×sold?5% · 1×he sells5% · 1×other renderings14% · 3×

22 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb91%adverbial9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 22 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καθέδραa seat, chairἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, pπᾶςall, the whole,

ἔχωI have, hold, posses

ὅσοςμήNeg

ἀσσάριονa small coin

στρουθίονa small bird, sp

καίand, even, also, nam

ὑπάγωI go away, depar

ὑπάγωI go away, depart

εἰμίI am, exist

πωλέωto sell22×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

ἀγοράζωI buyεἷςoneδίδωμιI offer, give

ὁArticle the

περιστεράa doveὑπάρχωI am, exist, am ἱμάτιονouter garment

φέρωI carry, bear, bring

ὁArticle the

ὅσος

ἔχωI have, hold, po

σύ

ὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπωλέω · 22× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Revelation

Across the New Testament7 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀγοράζωI buy×ἔχωI have, hold, possess×ὑπάρχωI am, exist, am in possession×ὑπάγωI go away, depart×ὅσος×ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, put out, banish, bring forth,×περιστεράa dove×δύο×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

מָכַרsell75%H4376 · 6 verses

Counted over the 8 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Cherubim 122c. AD 40

οἱ μὲν γὰρ διδόντες, ἀμοιβὴν ἔπαινον ἢ τιμὴν θηρώμενοι, ζητοῦντες χάριτος ἀντίδοσιν, εὐπρεπεῖ δωρεᾶς ὀνόματι κυρίως πρᾶσιν ἐργάζονται, ἐπεὶ καὶ τοῖς πωλοῦσιν ἀνθ’ ὧν ἂν παράσχωσιν ἔθος λαμβάνειν ἐστίν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.39c. AD 75–95

Ἰώσηπον δὲ πωλούμενον ὑπὸ τῶν ἐμπόρων ὠνησάμενος Πετεφρὴς ἀνὴρ Αἰγύπτιος ἐπὶ τῶν Φαραώθου μαγείρων τοῦ βασιλέως εἶχεν ἐν πάσῃ τιμῇ καὶ παιδείαν τε τὴν ἐλευθέριον ἐπαίδευε καὶ διαίτῃ χρῆσθαι κρείττονι τῆς ἐπὶ δούλῳ τύχης ἐπέτρεπεν ἐγχειρίζει τε τὴν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD

P.Mich. 10 583Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 78

καὶ εἰσοδεύοντας καὶ ἐξοδεύοντας καὶ κατασπῶντας καὶ ἀνοικοδομοῦντας ἐν αὐτοῖς ὡς ἐὰν αἱρῶνται ἔτι πωλοῦντας ὑποτιθέντας ἑτέροις μεταδιοικοῦντας χρωμένους αὐτοῖς καθʼ ὃν ἐὰν βούλωνται τρόπον ἀπαραποδίστως, καὶ πρὸς τὰ

P.Mich. 10 584Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 84

ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ ἐὰν βούλωνται καὶ ἐνοικοῦντας καὶ ἐνοικίζοντας καὶ τὰ ἐνοίκια ἀποφερομένους καὶ πωλοῦντας καὶ ὑποτιθέντας καὶ οἰκονομοῦντας περὶ αὐτῶν καθʼ ὃν ἐὰν αἱρῶνται τρόπον ἀπαραποδίστως. ἐνμενέτωσαν οὖν

P.Mil.Vogl. 1 23Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 108

ἕκαστος ἐπανείρηται καὶ τὰ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος ιβ ἔτους περιεσόμενα ἀποφερομένους καὶ πωλοῦντας καὶ ὑποτιθεμένους καὶ οἰκονομοῦντας περὶ αὐτῶν, ὡς ἐὰν αἱρώμεθα, καὶ … αρεξεσθαι ἐφʼ ἃ

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

εἰei only G1487 Conditional particle ¶

501× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means 'if' and is used to express conditions or questions. It appears in many Bible verses, such as Matthew 11:14 and Romans 8:25, introducing a condition or hypothesis.

Tyndale gloss

if

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εἰ, transliterated as ei, is a primary conditional particle meaning 'if' or 'whether.' It is used in various contexts, including conditions, indirect questions, and expressions of wishes. In the New Testament, it appears frequently, often followed by different verb tenses to indicate various conditions. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰ,

conjunctive particle, used in conditions and in indirect questions.

Conditional, if;

c. indic., expressing a general assumption;

pres.: seq. indic, pres., Mt 11:14, Ro 8:25, al.; seq. imperat., Mk 4:23 9:22, Jo 15:18, I Co 7:9, al.; seq. fut. indic., Lk 16:31, Ro 8:11, al.; seq. pf. or aor., with negation in apodosis, Mt 12:26, Ro 4:14, al.; similarly, seq. impf., Lk 17:6, Jo 8:39; seq. quæst.,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰ 109 εἰ WH, s0 Trin Mt. xii. 41; Ὀζείας L T Tr WH; Πειλᾶτος T WH; Σεμεείν T Tr WH; Ταβειθά WH; Χερουβείν 1, T Tr WH (-βίμ RG); Χοραζείν T Tr WH; ἀφείδεια L; εἰδέα T Tr WH; ἐπαρχεία T WH; ἐπιπόθεια WH; ἡλεί T ; πανοικεί TWH; ῥαββεί T WH; ῥαββουνεί WH; σαβαχθανεί Tr WH; ταλειθά WH; τάχειον WH; τραπεζείτης T WH.| el, is first a conditional particle, ἐγ (Lat. si) ; secondly, an interrogative particle, whether, (Lat. an, num, ne). I. εἰ CoNDITIONAL (on the difference between it and ἐάν, see ἐάν, I. 1 b.) is connected, according to the variety of conditions, with various tenses and moods; viz. ἘΣ with the Indicative of all tenses, when anything is simply and generally assumed to be, or to be done, or to have been done, or to be about to be, (W. § 41 b., 2; ef. 42, 2; [Β. 220(190)]). a. withthe Ind. Present; a. foll. in the apodosis by the ind. pres.: Mt. xix. 10 (εἰ οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ αἰτία...…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ΕἸ , J ἐκπλησσω γὰρ τὸ ἀγαθὸν τοῦ ἀστέρος καὶ εἰς τὸ ἐναντίον ἐκπίπτει. See also Michel 827 A (mid. 11,8.0.) τό τε νόμισμα τὸ ἐκπεπτωκὸς ἀριθμῶι, of coins that have fallen out of use. The verb is not infrequent with reference to crops that “fall to be included”’ in the produce of a particular year, eg. BGU II. 5915" (A.p. 56-7) βουλόμεθα μισθώσασθαι τοὺς ἐκπεπτωκότας εἰς τὸ τρίτον ἔτος Νέρωνος. . . φοινεικίνους καρπούς, P Fay ο115 (A.p. 99) ἐϊλαϊκοὺς καρποὺς ἐκπεππτωκότας (/. ἐκπεπτωκ --Ἰ εἰς τὸ ἐνεστὸ(ς) τρίτον ἔτος. Cf. P Hib I. γ810 (B.c. 244--3) a letter requesting that two persons should be released from some public service—81a τὸ μὴ ἐκπεσίεῖν αὐτοῖς τὸ viv λειτουργῆσαι, ‘because it is not at present their turn to serve,’’ where the editors point out that éxmec[et]v, which has been corrected in the papyrus, is practically equivalent to προσπέσηι in 1.4 of the same document. For the…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰ (ei) — if.

εἰ,

Attic dialect-Ionic dialect and [Refs 4th c.AD+] ἤ [Refs] in Epic dialect:— Particle used interjectionally with imperative and to express a wish, but usually either in conditions, if, or in indirect questions, whether. In the former use its regular negative is μ; in the latter, οὐ.

__A INTERJECTIONALLY, in [Refs 8th c.BC+], come now! with imperative, εἰ δὲ.. ἄκουσον [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.2 in wishes, with optative, ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τις.. καλέσειεν [Refs]; so later, εἴ μοι ξυνείη μοῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of unattained wishes, in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later with past tenses of indicative, εἰ γάρ μ᾽ ὑπὸ γῆν.. ἧκεν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; εἰ γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον ὥστε.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]infinitive (compare the use of infinitive in commands), αἰ γὰρ τοῖος ἐὼν.. ἐμὸς γαμβρὸς καλέεσθαι…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰ

ei

a primary particle of conditionality; if, whether, that,

etc.:--forasmuch as, if, that, (al-)though, whether. Often used in

connection or composition with other particles, especially as in 1489,

1490, 1499, 1508, 1509, 1512, 1513, 1536, 1537. See also 1437.

see GREEK for 1489

see GREEK for 1490

see GREEK for 1499

see GREEK for 1508

see GREEK for 1509

see GREEK for 1512

see GREEK for 1513

see GREEK for 1536

see GREEK for 1537

see GREEK for 1437

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰ

Cond.

if

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰ ei 502x

if, Mt. 4:3, 6; 12:7; Acts 27:39, freq.; since, Acts 4:9; whether, Mk. 9:23; Acts 17:11; that, in certain expressions, Acts 26:8, 23; Heb. 7:15; by a suppression of the apodosis of a sentence, εἰ serves to express a wish; O if! O that! Lk. 19:42; 22:42; also a strong negation, Mk. 8:12; Heb. 3:11; 4:3; εἰ καί, if even, though, although, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

COND — Conditional particle
conditional particle — it marks the clause as a condition.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

COND CONDitional particle or conjunction

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

74%if

if74% · 388×only17% · 89×whether3% · 14×lest3% · 14×other renderings3% · 17×

522 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 501 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδίδωμιI offer, giveἐπερωτάωI interrogate, q

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fδίδωμιI offer, give

ὅτιthat, since, because

ΒηθσαϊδάPropγινώσκωI come to know, σύ

σύ

ἐνλέγωI say, speakἐπερωτάωI interrogate, q

λέγωI say, speak

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςἐγώ

εἰonly501×

what comes after →

δέbut, on the other ha

τὶςὁArticle theεἰ δὲ μήNeg

μήNeg

ὁArticle theἐνεἷςone

τὶς

θέλωI will, wish, deδοκέωI think, seem, aἔχωI have, hold, po

γάρfor

ὁArticle theπιστεύωI believe, have διά

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godΣατανᾶςan adversary, Saδεξιόςon the right han

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰ · 501× in the New Testament

1 Corinthians Matthew Luke John Romans 2 Corinthians Acts Mark Galatians Hebrews Revelation 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μήNeg×τὶς×δυνατόςpowerful, able, possible×εἰ δὲ μήNeg×δοκέωI think, seem, appear, it seems×ἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted, lawful, possible×ἐπερωτάωI interrogate, question, demand of×πιστόςtrustworthy, faithful, believing×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אִםconj46%H518 · 142 verses

Counted over the 307 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

μὴmē except G3361 Particle · negative ¶

1,060× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Not is a word used to show that something is not true or is not happening, like in phrases that say 'lest' or 'God forbid', as seen in various parts of the New Testament.

Tyndale gloss

not

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μή (mē) is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μή,

subjective negative particle,

used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]

As a neg. adv., not;

with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.

In delib. questions, c. subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mk 12:14, Ro 3:8.

In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mt 10:14,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μή (mē) — not.

μή,

Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)

__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,

__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

μή

me

a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an

absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an

interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an

affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +

lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,

nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in

substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,

3373, 3375, 3378.

see GREEK for 3756

see GREEK for 3362

see GREEK for 3363

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 3373

see GREEK for 3375

see GREEK for 3378

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μή

Neg.prt.

not, lest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μή mē 1x

a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

71%not

not71% · 772×except9% · 95×unless5% · 58×surely not4% · 41×lest3% · 32×otherwise2% · 23×other renderings4% · 48×other renderings1% · 16×

1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial84%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

καίand, even, also,σύἐγώ

ἵναin order that, so th

αὐτόςσύπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώαὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist

εἰCond

αὐτόςυἱόςa son, descendenκαίand, even, also,

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,εἰςδιά

μήexcept1060×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenσημεῖονa sign, miracle,

ἔχωI have, hold, posses

καίand, even, also,ποιμήνa shepherdβάθοςdepth, a depth,

εἰμίI am, exist

δίδωμιI offer, giveἐνμετά

τὶς

σύὑστερέωI am lacking, faγεννάωI beget, bring f

φοβέωI fear, am terrified

ἀπόὁArticle theμόνοςalone, but, only

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμή · 1,060× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew John 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy Galatians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

εἰCond×ἐάνCond×φοβέωI fear, am terrified×βλέπωI look, see×πότεIrg×μηδέNeg×ἐσθίωI eat×πλανάωI lead astray, deceive×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַלadv. of negation, denying however, not objectively a20%H408 · 273 verses

Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

ὁho the [one] G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wun.

See NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe [one]19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

ἔχωνechō having G2192 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

709× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means to have or hold something, like a possession or ability. It is used in many ways, such as having power or being with someone. The Bible uses it in Revelation 5:8 and 14:6.

Tyndale gloss

to have/be

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔχω, transliterated as echō, means 'to have' or 'to hold' and is used in various contexts, including possession, ability, and condition. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often relating to physical possession or metaphorical concepts like keeping faith or emotions. Notably, it can also refer to being pregnant, as seen in Matthew 1:18. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔχω,

[in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), בַּעַל, יֵשׁ, etc., 59 words in all;]

(on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, v. M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183),

to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions.

Trans.;

to have, hold, hold fast, etc.;

to hold, as, in the hand: Re 5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Re 1:16 10:2, al.;

of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mt 3:4 22:12, al.; so freq. pres. ptcp. (LS, s.v., A, I, 6; Bl., § 74, 2), Mk 11:13, Jo 18:10, Re 9:17, al.;

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. εἴχαμεν, 2 Jn. ἔχω 266 5 T Tr WH], 8 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; Rey. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but ef. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) and εἴχοσαν (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bitm. in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Τὰ Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. δολεόω ]) ; pres. mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,—with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; pf. ἔσχηκα; I. Transitively. have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, ete.; Heb. viii. 3. Ὁ. in the sense of wearing (Lat. gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. τί, having a covering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head covered [B. $130, 5; W. §…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔχω. It may be well to illustrate some of the less usual forms of this common verb. The future σχήσω (cf. Kithner-Blass Gr. 1. ii. p. 112 n.8) is restored by the editor in OGZS 751° (ii/ B.C.) ἐπεὶ θλιβέντες ἐμ πλείοσιν ἀσθενῶς [σχή]σετε. For the 2 aor. with 1 aor. termination (cf. Ac 757 D συνἐσχαν) see BGU 11. 4518 (i/ii A.D.) ἀναγκαίως ἔσχαμεν δ[ι7᾽ ἐπιστολῆς σε ἀσπάσεσθαι, and for ἔσχοσαν cf. OG/S 315°" (B.C. 164-159) ὑφοψίαν μοχθηράν, ἣν Kal περὶ Tod ἀδελφοῦ ἔσχοσαν. In 20. 2237 (iii/B.c.) we have αὐτοὶ ἀπολογισάμενοι περί τε τῆς εὐνοίας ἣν διὰ παντὸς εἰσχήκατε εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν οἰκίαν, and for similar forms see the editor's note ® to 2b. 323. For the trans. use of the verb see such passages as P Oxy IV. 743!® (B.c. 2) εἰ καὶ m[p]ds ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα, βοηθὸν αὐτοῦ γ[εἸνέσθαι διὰ ἣν ἔχομε(ν) πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς φιλίαν, BGU I. 228(a.p. 114) (= «ϑελδείζογις, p. 74), which illustrate 1 Cor…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔχω (echō) — to have/be.

ἔχω,

__A2nd pers. singular ἔχεισθα conjecture in [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive ἔχῃσθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect εἶχον, Epic dialect ἔχον [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect and poetry ἔχεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἕξω, Epic dialect infinitive ἑξέμεναι [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (of momentary action, especially in sense check, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+], not found in Attic dialect Inscrr. or [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular σχήσησθα [Refs]aorist 1 ἔσχης α falsa lectio in [Refs 3rd c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔσχον, imperative σχές [Refs 5th c.BC+] only in Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive σχῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural σχοίησαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive σχεῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect σχέμεν [Refs] (in Alexandr. Gr. 3rd.pers. plural imperfect and aorist 2 εἴχοσαν [NT+3rd c.BC+], see at {Σχέθω}: perfect ἔσχηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔχω

echo

scheo skheh'-o; (used in certain tenses only)

a primary verb; to hold (used in very various applications, literally

or figuratively, direct or remote; such as possession; ability,

contiuity, relation, or condition):--be (able, X hold, possessed

with), accompany, + begin to amend, can(+ -not), X conceive, count,

diseased, do + eat, + enjoy, + fear, following, have, hold, keep, +

lack, + go to law, lie, + must needs, + of necessity, + need, next, +

recover, + reign, + rest, + return, X sick, take for, + tremble, +

uncircumcised, use.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔχω

v.

I have, hold, possess

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔχω echō 708x

pluperfect., ἐσχήκειν, to hold, Rev. 1:16; to seize, possess a person, Mk. 16:8; to have, possess, Mt. 7:29, et al. freq.; to have, have ready, be furnished with, Mt. 5:23; Jn. 5:36; 6:68; to have as a matter of crimination, Mt. 5:23; Mk. 11:25; to have at command, Mt. 27:65; to have the power, be able, Mt. 18:25; Lk. 14:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PAP-NSM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

29%having

having29% · 211×has9% · 62×have8% · 58×you have7% · 52×i have5% · 36×we have5% · 35×he has3% · 24×had3% · 21×other renderings30% · 217×

716 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 97 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 709 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

καίand, even, also,ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fἄνθρωποςa man, one of th

ὁArticle the

ἄγγελοςan angel, messenαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,

μήNeg

ὁArticle theδέbut, on the otheπρόβατονa sheep

ὅς

καίand, even, also,ἐνεἰμίI am, exist

χρείαneed, necessity, bus

οὐNegαὐτόςὅς

ἔχωhaving709×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἑπτάIndecυἱόςa son, descendenδέbut, on the othe

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὐNegὅς

ἐν

ὁArticle theἑαυτοῦΧριστόςanointed, the Me

οὖςthe ear

ἀκούωI hear, listen

ἐξουσίαpower, authority, we

ὁArticle theἀλλάbut, exceptἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔχω · 709× in the New Testament

Revelation John Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Acts Hebrews 1 John Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

χρείαneed, necessity, business×ἐξουσίαpower, authority, weight×ζωήlife×ἑπτάIndec×οὖςthe ear×αἰώνιοςeternal, unending×κακῶςbadly, evilly×κεφαλήthe head×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Gen. 1 20Pathyris110 BC

ἔτους η Μεχεὶρ β, ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῆι κάτω

P.Bad. 2 3Pathyris110 BC

Μεχεὶρ β ἐν Παθύρει ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῇ κάτω

P.Adl. 4Ptolemais (Oberägypten)110 BC

Ψεμμῖνις … ου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ ἔχειν παρὰ σοῦ χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα τρῖα ἄτοκα ?. ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ προσωφείλετό σοι

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

τὸho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · neuter ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

χάραγμαcharagma mark — G5480 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter ¶

8× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A charagma is a mark or image, like the mark of the beast in Revelation 13:16-17, or a statue, as seen in Acts 17:29.

Amplified meaning

the image, a sign

Tyndale gloss

image/mark

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word χάραγμα (*charagma*) means an engraved mark or stamp, derived from the verb χαράσσω (to engrave). It covers a range of meanings including a stamp of servitude, a sculpture, or an imprint, and is notably used in the New Testament to refer to the 'mark of the beast' in Revelation 13:16-17. The lexicons mention its use in various contexts, including coins and official documents.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* χάραγμα, -τος, τό

(< χαράσσω, to engrave),

a stamp, impress, mark: Re 13:16, 17 14:9, 11 16:2 19:20 20:4 (v. Deiss., BS, 240 ff.);

a thing graven: Ac 17:29.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

χάραγμα, -ros, τό, (χαράσσω to engrave) ; a.a stamp, an imprinted mark: of the mark stamped on the forehead or the right hand as the badge of the followers of Antichrist, Rev. xiii. 16 sq.; xiv. 9,11; xv. 2 Rec.; xvi. 2; xix. 20; xx. 4, (πυρός, the mark branded upon horses, Anacr. 26 [55], 2). b. thing carved, sculpture, graven work: of idolatrous images, Acts xvii. 29. (In various other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. down.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

χάραγμα in the sense of the impress made by a stamp occurs seplies in Rev, fer with special reference to ‘‘the mark of the beast” (1317, 16%, 1039). The exact meaning of the figure has been much discussed. Deissmann (AS, p. 240 ff.) suggests that an explanation may be found in the fact that, according to papyrus texts, it was customary to affix to bills of sale or official documents of the 18¢ and 2nd centuries of the Empire a seal giving the year and name of the reigning Emperor, and possibly his effigy. Thus on the back of CPR I. 11 (A.D, 108), an agreement regarding a house, there can still be deciphered a red seal with the inscr. (ἔτους) B Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Népova Τραιανοῦ. But no evidence has been produced of a similar seal being attached to persons, and Swete (Comm. ad Rev 315) is content to find an explanation of the mysterious ‘“‘ mark” in the general symbolism of the book.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

χάραγμα (charagma) — image/mark.

χάραγ-μα [χᾰ], ατος, τό,

(χαράσσω) any mark engraved, imprinted, or branded, χ. ἐχίδνης the serpent's mark, i. e. its bite, sting, [NT+5th c.BC+]; χ. χειρός, i.e. writing, [Refs 6th c.AD+]; χαράγματα παμβασιλῆος, of an imperial missive, Epic. in [Refs]: absolutely, inscription, [Refs 4th c.AD+]; stamped document, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; brand on a camel, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; χ. τέχνης carved work, [NT]; τὸ χ. τοῦ νομίσματος the impress on the coin, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; hence,

2. stamped money, coin, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

3. metaphorically, mark, stamp, character, τὸ τῆς μονάδος σημαντικὸν χ. [Refs]

4. endorsement, [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

χάραγμα

charagma

from the same as 5482; a scratch or etching, i.e. stamp (as a badge of

servitude), or scupltured figure (statue):--graven, mark.

see GREEK for 5482

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

χάραγμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

sculpture, a stamp, sign

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

χάραγμα charagma 8x

an imprinted mark, Rev. 13:16, 17; 14:9, 11; 16:2; 19:20; 20:4; sculpture, Acts 17:29*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

χάραγμα χάραγμα, ατος, τό, χαράσσω any mark engraven or imprinted, χ. ἐχίδνης the serpent's mark, i. e. its bite, Soph.; τὸ χ. τοῦ θηρίου the mark of the beast, NTest.; χ. τέχνης carved work, id. NTest.; τὸ χ. τοῦ νομίσματος the impress on the coin, Plut.: absol. an inscription, Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

mark: In the King James Version this word is used 22 times as a noun and 26 times as a predicate. In the former case it is represented by 5 Hebrew and 3 Greek words; in the latter by 11 Hebrew and 2 Greek words. As a noun it is purely a physical term, gaining almost a technical significance from the "mark" put upon Cain (Ge 4:15 the King James Version); the stigmata of Christ in Paul's body (Ga 6:17); the "mark of the beast" (Re 16:2).

As a verb it is almost exclusively a mental process: e.g. "to be attentive," "understand ": bin (Job 18:2 the King James Version), rightly rendered in the Revised Version (British and American) "consider"; shith, "Mark ye well her bulwarks" (

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Mark

The evangelist; “John whose surname was Mark” (Acts 12:12, 25). Mark (Marcus, Col. 4:10, etc.) was his Roman name, which gradually came to supersede his Jewish name John. He is called John in Acts 13:5, 13, and Mark in 15:39, 2 Tim. 4:11, etc.

He was the son of Mary, a woman apparently of some means and influence, and was probably born in Jerusalem, where his mother resided (Acts 12:12). Of his father we know nothing. He was cousin of Barnabas (Col. 4:10). It was in his mother’s house that Peter found “many gathered together praying” when he was released from…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

one of the evangelists, and probable author of the Gospel bearing his name. (Marcus was his Latin surname. His Jewish name was John, which is the same as Johanan (the grace of God). We can almost trace the steps whereby the former became his prevalent name in the Church. "John, whose surname was Mark" in (Acts 12:12,25; 15:37) becomes "John" alone in (Acts 13:5,13) "Mark" in (Acts 15:39) and thenceforward there is no change. (Colossians 4:10); Phlm 1:24; 2Tim 4:11 The evangelist was the son of a certain Mary, a Jewish matron of some position who dwelt in Jerusalem…

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

same as Marcus

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%mark

mark89% · 8×graven thing11% · 1×

9 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

object88%adverbial13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

λαμβάνωI receive, takeἔχωI have, hold, po

λίθοςa stone

ἤDisj

αὐτός

δίδωμιI offer, give

λαμβάνωI receive, take

καίand, even, also,

χάραγμαmark —8×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ὄνομαname, character,θηρίονa wild beast, an

ἐπί

ὁArticle the

τέχνηart, skill, trade

καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceχάραγμα · 8× in the New Testament

Revelation Acts

Across the New Testament2 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

λαμβάνωI receive, take×ἐπί×ἔχωI have, hold, possess×ὄνομαname, character, reputation×μέτωπονthe forehead×θηρίονa wild beast, animal×

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Gen. 1 30Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 142

Νήσου τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ πεπρακέναι σοι κάμηλον θήλειαν ὑπόπωλον δευτεροβόλον πυρρὰν κεχαραγμένην Ἀραβικῷ χαράγματι ἐπὶ τῇ δεξιᾷ σιαγόνι η καὶ ἀπέχω τὴν τιμὴν ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς … κοσίας. καὶ

BGU 2 453Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 154

ὑπαρχόντων μοι καμήλων κάμηλον θήλειαν τελείαν μίαν πυρρὰν κεχαραγμένην ἐπὶ τῷ μηρῷ δεξιῷ ἀραβικὸν χάραγμα καὶ ἀπέχω παρὰ σοῦ τὴν συνπεφωνημένην τιμὴν πᾶσαν ἐκ πλήρους ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς πεντακοσίας ὀγδοήκοντα

P.Lond. 3 p. LVII no. 1100 descr.AD 177

Ἀρσενοείτου χαίρειν. πέπρακά σοι καμήλιον θῆλυ τέλειον … κεχαραγμένην ἐν τῷ δεξιῷ μηρῷ ὀπισθίῳ χαράγματι θῆτα ει καὶ … … υτια … μ … χα … ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

ἢ, or G2228 ¶

343× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Or is a word used to show a choice between two things, like in Matthew 5:17 where it's either obey God's law or not. It's also used to compare things, like in Romans 1:21 where it's one thing or another.

Tyndale gloss

or

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἤ (ē) is a particle used to indicate distinction, functioning as a disjunctive 'or' and a comparative 'than.' It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in phrases like 'either...or' and in disjunctive questions. Notably, it can also express comparisons after comparative terms, such as in Matthew 10:15. The entries do not show any significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11);

disjunctive, or;

between single words: Mt 5:17, Mk 6:56, Lk 2:24, Jo 6:19, Ro 1:21, al.;

before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, freq. in interrog. form: Mt 7:4, 9, Mk 12:14, Lk 13:4, Ro 3:29 6:3 9:21, I Co 6:9, 16 9:6, II Co 11:7; ἢ . . . ἤ…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Χριστοῦ (NVWT ΒΗ Targ. Jonath. ad ᾿ς lili. 10), the kingdom of the Messiah, which will be founded by God through the Messiah and over which the Messiah will preside as God’s vicegerent; ἡ Bac. τῶν οὐρανῶν, only in Matthew, but very frequently [some 33 times], the kingdom of heaven, i. e. the kingdom which is of heavenly or divine origin and nature (in rabbin. writ. nown mao is the rule of God, the theocracy viewed universally, not the Messianic kingdom); sometimes simply ἡ βασιλεία : Mt. iv. 23, ete.; Jas. ii. 5; once ἡ Bac. τοῦ Δαυείδ, because it was supposed the Messiah would be one of David’s descendants and a king very like David, Mk. xi. 10; once also ἡ Bac. τοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ θεοῦ, Eph. ν. 5. Relying principally on the prophecies of Daniel — who had declared it to be the purpose of God that, after four vast and mighty kingdoms had succeeded one another and the last of…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἢ μή. The general distinction between οὐ and μή is that οὐ is objective, dealing only with facts, while μή is sudjectize, involving will and thought. But in late Greek μή has encroached very largely upon οὐ, with the result that in the NT οὐ is almost entirely confined to the indicative, while μή monopolizes the other moods (but see I. 5). A few exx. of some of the many uses of μή will make this clear. I. Μή negatives (1) the conjunctive (a) after ἐάν (4v)—P Oxy II. 294%? (A.D. 22) (= Selections, p. 36), where certain men are confined to prison, ἐὰν μή τι πίσωσι τὸν ἀρχιστάτορα δο[ῦν]αι etk(= ἱκ)ανόν, ‘* unless indeed they shall persuade the chief usher to give security,’’ BGU II. 5301” \i/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 61) alav (/. ἐὰν) μὴ ἔλθῃς, κινδυνεύω ἐκστῆvat od ἔχω [κλή]ρου, “if you do not come I run the risk of losing the lot (of land) which I possess ”—a father writes to Selections…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἤ (ē) — or.

ἤ,

Epic dialect also ἠέ (in signification [Refs 4th c.BC+], conjunction with two chief senses, Disj. (or) and comparative (than).

__A DISJUNCTIVE, or, ἐγὼ.. ἢ ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θεόσυτος ἢ βρότειος ἢ κεκραμένη [Refs 4th c.BC+]

__A.2 ἢ.. ἤ either.. or, ἢ νῦν δηθύνοντ᾽ ἢ ὕστερον αὖτις ἰόντα [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.; so ἢ.. ἤτοι.. [Refs 5th c.BC+] is emphasized, later no distinction is implied, [NT+2nd c.BC+]; ἤ repeated any number of times, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι ἢ τεὸν ἢ Αἴαντος ἰὼν γέρας ἢ Ὀδυσῆος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἤ is probably wrongly accented in codices of [Refs 8th c.BC+] adverb [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἤ

e

a primary particle of distinction between two connected terms;

disjunctive, or; comparative, than:--and, but (either), (n-)either,

except it be, (n-)or (else), rather, save, than, that, what, yea.

Often used in connection with other particles. Compare especially

2235, 2260, 2273.

see GREEK for 2235

see GREEK for 2260

see GREEK for 2273

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἤ

Disj.prt.

or, than

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἤ ē 343x

can function as a conj (298x), either, or, Mt. 6:24; after comparatives, and ἄλλος, ἕτερος, expressed or implied, than, Mt. 10:15; 18:8; Acts 17:21; 24:21; intensive after ἀλλά and πρίν, Lk. 12:51; Mt. 1:18; it also serves to point an interrogation, Rom. 3:29

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

—

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

or: The word is used once for either (1Sa 26:10), and is still in poetic use in this sense; as in, "Without or wave or wind" (Coleridge); "Or the bakke or some bone he breketh in his dzouthe" (Piers Plowman (B), VII, 93; compare Merchant of Venice, III, ii, 65). It is also used with "ever" for before (Ps 90:2; Ecclesiasticus 18:19), which the American Standard Revised Version substitutes in Ec 12:6 (compare 12:1,2); So 6:12; Da 6:24.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

84%or

or84% · 304×than13% · 47×other renderings4% · 13×

364 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial20%object18%subject12%predicate7%verb4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 343 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

σύ

πρόςχείρa handἁμαρτίαa sin

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ὁArticle theκακολογέωI speak evil of,ἤDisj

εἰμίI am, exist

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἀνεκτόςendurable, tolerθεόςGod, a god

αὐτός

πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenβοῦςan ox

ἀδελφόςa brother

ἤDisjὁArticle theἐάνCond

ἤor343×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

μήτηρa motherπόλιςa cityδύο

τίςIrg

πίνωI drink, imbibeεἰμίI am, existλαλέωI speak, say

οὐNeg

οἶδαI know, rememberἀναγινώσκωI readδίδωμιI offer, give

ἐν

φυλακήa watching, guarτίςIrgποῖοςIrg

καίand, even, also, nam

ἰχθύςa fishαἰτέωI ask, request, πρός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἤ · 343× in the New Testament

Matthew 1 Corinthians Luke Acts Mark Romans 2 Corinthians John 1 Peter Galatians James Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἤDisj×τίςIrg×δύο×μήτηρa mother×οἰκίαa house, household×μᾶλλονmore, rather×ἀδελφήa sister×τέκνονa child, descendent, inhabitant×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אוֹor28%H176 · 131 verses אִםconj26%H518 · 123 verses

Counted over the 457 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

τὸho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · neuter ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

ὄνομαonoma name G3686 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter ¶

229× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A name refers to a person's character or authority, as in Matthew 10:2 and John 18:10. It represents who someone is or what they are known for. Jesus taught about the importance of a good name and reputation.

Amplified meaning

character, authority

Tyndale gloss

name

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὄνομα (onoma) means 'name' and can refer to the title or reputation of a person or thing. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as indicating authority or character (e.g., Mt 10:41) and is often contrasted with the reality behind the name (e.g., Rev 3:1). The term can also signify a mere name or pretext, as seen in Mk 9:41.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὄνομα, -τος, τό,

[in LXX chiefly for שֵׁם;]

in general, the name by which a person or thing is called: Mt 10:2, Mk 3:16, Lk 1:63, Jo 18:10, al.; ἄνθρωπος (etc.), ᾧ (οὗ) ὄ. (τ. ὄ), sc. ἦν or ἐστίν (Bl., § 30, 3), Mk 14:32, Lk 1:26, 27; with same ellipsis, καὶ τ. ὄ. αὐτοῦ (ὄ. αὐτῷ), Lk 1:5, Jo 1:6, al.; ὀνόματι, seq. nom. prop., Mt 27:32, Mk 5:22, Lk 1:5, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὄνομα, -ros, τό, (NOM [others TNO; see Vaniéek p. 1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name], with prefixed o [but see Curtius § 446]), Sept. for pw, [fr. Hom. down], the name by which a person or a thing is called, and distinguished from others; 1. univ.: of prop. names, Mk. iii. 16; vi. 14; Acts xiii. 8, etc. ; τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ ὀνόματα, Mt. x. 2; Rev. xxi. 14; ἄνθρωπος or ἀνὴρ @ ὄνομα, πόλις ἢ Ov. , Sc. ἦν, named, foll. by the name in the nom. [ef. B. § 129, 20,3]: Lk. i. 26sq.; 11. 25; viii. 41; xxiv. 13,18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11, 1); οὗ [L ᾧ] τὸ ὄνομα, Mk. xiv. 32; καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, ete., Lk. i. 5, 27; ὄνομα αὐτῷ se. ἦν or ἐστίν [B. u.s.], Jn. i.6; ili. 1; xviii. 10; Rey. vi. 8; ὀνόματι, foll. by the name [cf. B. § 129 a. 3; W. 182 (171) ], Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. v. 22; Lk.i. 5; x. 38; xvi. 20; xxiii.50; Actsv. 1,34; vili. 9; ix. 10-12, 33, 86; χ- 1; χὶ; 28,5 Χ- 19., χυ!. ἔν 14.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὄνομα. (1) For ὄνομα, the ame by which a person or thing is called, we may cite: P Magd 24! (B.c. 218) Αἰγυπτία τις, ἧι λέγεται εἶναι ὄνομα Ψενοβάστι[ς, P Lond 854” (i/ii a.p.) (ΞΞ ΠΙ. p. 206, Selections p. 70) τῶν φίλων [ἐ]μ[ῶν τ]ὰ ὀνόματα ἐνεχάραξα τοῖς ἱ[εἸροῖς ἀειμνή (σὺ τως, “1 carved the names of my friends on the sanctuaries for perpetual remembrance ”—a traveller’s letter, and BGU 11. 4232 (i1/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 92) to[t]t [δέ] pov ὄνομα ᾿Αντῶνις Μάξιμος. Deissmann (1.4.3, p. 121) claims the phrase ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα as ‘‘a characteristic documentary formula,” e.g. P Oxy III. 485%! (a.p. 178) ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐπὶ τῶν [τόπων δηλωθήσεται, ““ whose names will be ascertained on the spot” (Edd.), BGU 11. 432-38 (a.p. 190) ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα τῷ βιβλιδίῳ δεδήλωται, “whose names are shown in the little book” (cf. Phil 43). (2) By a usage similar to that of the Heb. Dv’, ὄνομα comes in the NT to…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὄνομα (onoma) — name.

ὄνομα,

Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect ὄνῠμα [Refs]; Laconian dialect *ἔνυμα probably in proper nouns Ἐνυμακρατίδας [Refs]; poetry also (for the sake of meter) οὔνομα (see.below), which appears regularly in codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in other Ionic dialect prose authors (variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+], but is probably not Ionic; Ionic dialect Inscrr. have only ὄνομα, [Refs 8th c.BC+] et saep.:—name of a person or thing, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always of a person, except ἐρέω δέ τοι οὔνομα λαῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ἀρήτη δ᾽ ὄνομ᾽ ἐστὶν ἐπώνυμον [Refs 8th c.BC+] is used absolutely, by name, πόλις ὄ. Καιναί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀνόματι λέγειν by name, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ὄνομα by name, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἀσπάζου τοὺς φίλους κατ᾽ ὄ. each by his name…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὄνομα

onoma

from a presumed derivative of the base of 1097 (compare 3685); a

"name" (literally or figuratively) (authority, character):--called, (+

sur-)name(-d).

see GREEK for 1097

see GREEK for 3685

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὄνομα, ατος, τό

n.n.

name, character, reputation

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὄνομα onoma 231x

a name; the proper name of a person, etc., Mt. 1:23, 25; 10:2; 27:32; a mere name or reputation, Rev. 3:1; in NT a name as the representative of a person, Mt. 6:9; Lk. 6:22; 11:2; the name of the author of a commission, delegated authority, or religious profession, Mt. 7:22; 10:22; 12:21; 18:5, 20; 19:29; 21:9; 28:19; Acts 3:16; 4:7, 12; εἰς ὄνομα, ἐν ὀνόματι, on the score of being possessor of a certain character, Mt. 10:41, 42; Mk.…

Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὄνομα ὄνομα, ατος, τό, Lat. nomen, a name, Hom., etc.:—absol., by name, πόλις ὄνομα Καιναί Xen., etc.; also in dat., πόλις Θάψακος ὀνόματι id. Xen.

ὄν. θεῖναί τινα to give one a name, Od.; but commonly in Mid., ὄν. θέσθαι id. Od., attic; and for Pass., ὄν. κεῖταί τινι Ar., etc.; ὄν. ἔχειν ἀπό τινος Hdt.

ὄνομα καλεῖν τινα to call one by name, Od., attic; so with pass. verbs. ὄν. ὠνομάζετο Ἕλενος Soph.; ὄν. κέκληται δημοκρατία Thuc.

name. fame, Ἰθάκης γε καὶ ἐς Τροίην ὄνομ᾽ ἵκει Od.; τὸ μέγα ὄν. τῶν Ἀθηνῶν Thuc.; ὄνομα or τὸ ὄν. ἔχειν to have a name for a thing (good or bad), 2 opt., Thuc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

nam (shem; onoma; Latin nomen (2 Esdras 4:1); verbs onomazo; Latin nomino (2 Esdras 5:26)): A "name" is that by which a person, place or thing is marked and known. In Scripture, names were generally descriptive of the person, of his position, of some circumstance affecting him, hope entertained concerning him, etc., so that "the name" often came to stand for the person. In Ac 1:15; Re 3:4, onoma stands for "persons"; compare Nu 26:53,55.

I. Old Testament Word and Use.

1. General:

The word for "name" in the Old Testament is shem (also the name of one of the sons of Noah). The etymology is uncertain, although it may be from shamah (obs.), "to set a mark"; shum is the Aramaic form. For the name as descriptive of the person see NAMES.…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Value of a good Pr 22:1; Ec 7:1

→ A new name given to persons who have spiritual adoption Isa 62:2

→ To Abraham Ge 17:5

→ Sarah Ge 17:15

→ Jacob Ge 32:28

→ Paul Ac 13:9

→ Intercessional influence of the name of Jesus, for his people Na 1

→ See JESUS, IN HIS NAME

→ SYMBOLICAL Ho 1:3,4,6,9; 2:1

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(1) Good

1Sa 18:30; Pr 22:1; Ec 7:1; Ac 6:3; 10:22; 16:2; 22:12

2Co 8:18; 3Jo 1:12

(2) Of the Lord, Mighty

Ne 9:5; Ps 113:3; Pr 18:10; Isa 50:10; Mal 1:11

(3) Of the Lord to be Reverenced

Le 22:2; De 28:58;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

81%name

name81% · 187×named13% · 29×names6% · 13×other renderings1% · 2×

231 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial57%object21%subject20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 229 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐνἐπίδιά

ἐν

ἔρχομαιI come, goπᾶςall, the whole, ὕδωρwater

τὶς

δέbut, on the otheἱερεύςa priestἄνθρωποςa man, one of th

αὐτός

ἐπιτίθημιI put, place upoἐκἐπάνωon the top, abov

ὅς

ἀνήρa male human beiἹεροσόλυμαPropΓαλιλαίαGalilee

ὄνομαname229×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατήρfather, Father, θεόςGod, a god

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ἸησοῦςJesusἸωάννηςJohn

ἐγώ

ἐγώὁArticle theλέγωI say, speak

σύ

καίand, even, also,ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, pὅς

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

σῴζωI save, healὡσαννάHebrἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὄνομα · 229× in the New Testament

Acts Revelation Luke John Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews Philippians 1 John James

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

καλέωI call, invite, name×ὑπέρ×ἐπικαλέωI call by an additional name, appeal to×δέχομαιI take, receive, accept, welcome×ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, put out, banish, bring forth,×δώδεκαIndec×βαπτίζωI dip, submerge, baptize×δαιμόνιονan evil-spirit, demon×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

שֵׁםname (√ unknown)82%H8034 · 432 verses

Counted over the 527 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ἀλλ’ ὅ γε μέγας Μωυσῆς ἀλλοτριώτατον τοῦ ὁρατοῦ νομίσας εἶναι τὸ ἀγένητον — πᾶν γὰρ τὸ αἰσθητὸν ἐν γενέσει καὶ μεταβολαῖς οὐδέποτε κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὄν — τῷ μὲν ἀοράτῳ καὶ νοητῷ προσένειμεν ὡς ἀδελφὸν καὶ συγγενὲς ἀιδιότητα, τῷ δ’ αἰσθητῷ γένεσιν οἰκεῖον…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.28c. AD 75–95

καὶ γενομένου τούτου κατανοήσας τὴν ὅλην ὕλην διεχώρισε τό τε φῶς καὶ τὸ σκότος καὶ τῷ μὲν ὄνομα ἔθετο νύκτα, τὸ δὲ ἡμέραν ἐκάλεσεν ἑσπέραν τε καὶ ὄρθρον τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ τὴν ἀνάπαυσιν προσαγορεύσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Grenf. 1 43Thebais201 BC–102 BC

τὸ … κέναι ἡμῖν τὴν ἵππον καὶ παρʼ Ἰουδαίου … σθαι αὐτήν, οὗ τὸ ὄνομα ἀγνοοῦμεν. αὐτοῦ δὲ μηδʼ ἀποδεδωκότος ἡμῖν μηδὲ ἵππον μηδὲ τὴν πορείαν αὐτῆς ἐπιδεδωκότος, ἐγράψαμέν

P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα Εἰρήνην καὶ Ἀμπέλιον

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … · τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα Εἰρήνην καὶ

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

τοῦho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · neuter ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GSN — Article · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁof the19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

θηρίουthērion beast G2342 Noun · genitive · singular · neuter ¶

45× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A wild or dangerous animal is what this word refers to, used in Mark 1:13 and Revelation 6:8. It can also symbolize the Antichrist.

Amplified meaning

a wild animal

Tyndale gloss

wild animal

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θηρίον is a Greek word meaning 'wild beast' or 'animal,' often used to describe dangerous or venomous creatures. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Mark 1:13 and Acts 28:4. The term can also metaphorically refer to brutish or savage men, as seen in Titus 1:12. Some entries note its diminutive form, suggesting a smaller animal, but its primary usage aligns with that of a fierce beast.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ζῶον, θηρίον from a scan

In passages out of number one of these words might be employed quite as fitly as the other, even as there are many in which they are used interchangeably, as by Plutarch, De Cap. ex Inim. Util. ἃ. This does not however prove that there is no distinction between them, if other passages occur, however few, where one is fit and the other not; or where, though neither would be unfit, one would possess a greater fitness than the other. The distinction, latent in other cases, because there is nothing to evoke it, reveals itself in these. The difference between ζῶον (by Lachmann always more correctly accented ζῷον) and θηρίον is not that between two coordinate terms ; but one, the second, is wholly subordinate to the first, a less included in a greater. All creatures that live on earth, including man himself, λογικὸν καὶ πολιτικὸν ζῶον, as Plutarch (De Am. Prol. 8) so grandly describes him…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θηρίον, -ου, τό

(dimin. of θήρ),

[in LXX chiefly for חַיָּה;]

a wild beast, beast: Mk 1:13, Ac 11:6 28:4, 5, Tit 1:12, He 12:20, Ja 3:7, Re 6:8; of Antichrist, Re 11:7, 13-20.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θηρίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of 6p; hence a Little beast, little animal; Plat. Theaet. p. 171 e.; of bees, Theoer. 19, 6; but in usage it had almost always the force of its primitive; the later dimin. is θηρίδιον [ef. Epictet. diss. 2, 9, 67); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 7°m and 773, an animal; a wild animal, wild beast, beast : prop., Mk. i. 13; Acts x. 12 Ree.; xi. 6; xxviii. 4sq.; Heb. xii. 20; [Jas. iii. 7]; Rev. vi. 8; in Rev xi. 7 and chh. xiii.—xx., under the fig. of a ‘beast’ is depicted Antichrist, both his person and his kingdom and power, (see ἀντίχριστος); metaph. a brutal, bestial man, savage, ferocious, Tit. i. 12 [colloq. ‘ugly dogs’], (so in Arstph. eqq. 273; Plut. 439; nub. 184; [ef. Schmidt ch. 70,2; apparently never with allusion to the stupidity of beasts]; still other exx. are given by Kypke, Observy. ii. p. 379; θηρία ἜΣ Ignat. Smyrn. 4, οἵ. Δα Ephes. 7). [Syn. see…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θηρίον (thērion) — wild animal.

θηρίον, τό

(in form diminutive of θήρ), wild animal, especially of such as are hunted, μάλα γὰρ μέγα θηρίον ἦεν, of a stag, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Trag. only in Satyric drama, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the spider's prey, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; frequently of elephants, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]: plural, beasts, opposed to men, birds, and fishes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. generally, animal, [Refs]; of men, ἄνθρωπος πάντων θ. θεειδέστατον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the dog, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; of fishes, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of eels, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of leeches, [Refs]; of other small creatures, [Refs 5th c.BC+], either above or below the nature of man, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

3. beast, especially as hostile and odious to man, θηρία τε καὶ βοτά carnivora and graminivora, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; monster, creature, of sharks, etc.…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

θηρίον

therion

diminutive from the same as 2339; a dangerous animal:--(venomous,

wild) beast.

see GREEK for 2339

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θηρίον, ου, τό

n.n.

a wild beast, animal

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θηρίον thērion 46x

a beast, wild animal, Mk. 1:13; Acts 10:12; met. a brute, brutish man, Tit. 1:12

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θηρίον θηρίον, ου, τό, in form a Dim. of θήρ, but in usage equiv. to it. a wild animal, beast, of a stag, Od.;—of savage beasts, Hdt., Xen., etc.; but, of a pig, Plat.; of a dog, Theocr.:—in pl. beasts, opp. to men, birds, and fishes, wild animals, game, Hdt., Plat.:—proverb., ἢ θηρίον ἢ θεός, i. e. either below or above the nature of man, Arist.

an animal, Hdt., Plat.

a poisonous animal, reptile, serpent, NTest.

also as real Dim. a little animal, insect, of bees, Theocr.

as a term of reproach, beast! like Lat. bellua, French bete, Ar., Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

best: This word occurs often in both Old and New Testaments and denotes generally a mammal (though sometimes a reptile) in distinction to a man, a bird, or a fish. In this distinction the English is fairly in accord with the Hebrew and Greek originals. The commonest Hebrew words behemah and chai have their counterpart in the Arabic as do three others less often used, be`ir (Ge 45:17; Ex 22:5; Nu 20:8 the King James Version), nephesh (Le 24:18), and Tebhach (Pr 9:2). Behemah and A rabic bahimah are from a root signifying vagueness or dumbness and so denote primarily a dumb beast. Chai and Arabic chaiwan are from the root…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Beast

This word is used of flocks or herds of grazing animals (Ex. 22:5; Num. 20:4, 8, 11; Ps. 78:48); of beasts of burden (Gen. 45:17); of eatable beasts (Prov. 9:2); and of swift beasts or dromedaries (Isa. 60:6). In the New Testament it is used of a domestic animal as property (Rev. 18:13); as used for food (1 Cor. 15:39), for service (Luke 10:34; Acts…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

83%beast

beast83% · 39×beasts9% · 4×creature4% · 2×wild beasts2% · 1×wild animals2% · 1×

47 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

object33%subject27%adverbial20%indirect object11%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 45 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,προσκυνέωI worshipεἰκώνan image, likene

κακόςbad, evil

ψεύστηςa liar, deceiver

κἄνCond

διαστέλλωI give a commiss

φύσιςnature, inherent nat

γάρfor

θάλασσαthe sea, lake

ὁArticle the

θηρίονbeast45×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theἐκπροσκυνέωI worship

ὁArticle the

γῆthe earth, soil,ἀναβαίνωI go up, mount, πρῶτοςfirst, before

ὅς

ὁράωI see, look uponἔχωI have, hold, poεἰμίI am, exist

ἀναβαίνωI go up, mount, asce

ἔχωI have, hold, poἐκ

λέγωI say, speak

τίςIrgὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθηρίον · 45× in the New Testament

Revelation Acts Hebrews James Mark Titus

Across the New Testament6 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

προσκυνέωI worship×εἰκώνan image, likeness, bust×γῆthe earth, soil, land×ἀναβαίνωI go up, mount, ascend×ἐξουσίαpower, authority, weight×ἀριθμόςa number, total×ὅμοιοςlike, similar to×πρῶτοςfirst, before×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

חַיalive, living66%H2416 · 56 verses שָׂדַיfield, land29%H7704 · 25 verses

Counted over the 84 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 64c. AD 40

ἐξαγαγέτω ἡ γῆ κτήνη καὶ θηρία καὶ ἑρπετὰ καθ’ ἕκαστον γένος (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.59c. AD 75–95

τοῦ δὲ μὴ θηρίοις ἀλώμενος περιπέσῃ δεδιότος καὶ τοῦτον ἀπόληται τὸν τρόπον, ἐκέλευε μηδὲν ὑφορᾶσθαι σκυθρωπὸν ἀπὸ τοιαύτης αἰτίας, ἀλλʼ ἕνεκα τοῦ μηδὲν αὐτῷ ἐκ θηρίων γενέσθαι δεινὸν διὰ πάσης ἀδεῶς χωρεῖν γῆς·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.5c. AD 100

ὁμοίως περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ λέγει Δανιήλ: Καὶ εἶδον τὸ τέταρτον θηρίον τὸ πονηρὸν καὶ ἰσχυρὸν καὶ χαλεπώτερον παρὰ πάντα τὰ θηρία τῆς θαλάσσης, καὶ ὡς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἀνέτειλεν δέκα κέρατα, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μικρὸν κέρας παραφυάδιον, καὶ ὡς ἐταπείνωσεν ὑφ̓ ἓν τρία…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD undated

BIFAO 41 (1941), p. 169-171 no. 14Wâdi FawâkhirAD 40–AD 42

γράψον τὸ λιβέλλον ὅτι ἀπὸ Ἀγριππίνου ἕως ἄρτι ὑπὸ τοῖς ἐπάρχοις κυνηγοῦμεν πάντα τὰ θηρία καὶ πετεινὰ ἐπʼ ἔτους. ἃ πεπιάκαμεν δεδώκαμεν Κερεαλίῳ καὶ ἔπεμψέ σοι αὐτὰ καὶ τὰ

SymbOslo 71 (1996), p. 161 & 164Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 151

δραχμαὶ ὀκτὼ ἡμιωβέλιον χαλκοὶ 2, μαγδωλοφυλακίας τετρώβολον ἡμιωβέλιον, δεσμοφυλακίας ὀβολὸν, μερισμοῦ διπλῶν ὀβολὸν, μερισμοῦ θηρίων ἡμιωβέλιον χαλκοῦς 2. Ἐπεὶφ κη ὁμοίως ἐπικλασμοῦ ἀπόρων δραχμὰς ὀκτώ, γίνονται δραχμαὶ η.…

BGU 3 881Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 154

ὀκτὼ γίνονται δραχμαὶ η, Ἐπεὶφ κη ποταμοφυλακίδων τριώβολον δεσμοφυλάκων ὀβολὸν ἡμιωβέλιον, διπλῶν διώβολον ἡμιωβέλιον, θηρίων ὀβολὸν ἡμιωβέλιον δίχαλκον, ιη ἔτους Θῶθ κζ ιζ ἔτους ἐπιμερισμοῦ ἀπόρων ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς τέσσαρας

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

ἢē or G2228 Particle ¶

343× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Or is a word used to show a choice between two things, like in Matthew 5:17 where it's either obey God's law or not. It's also used to compare things, like in Romans 1:21 where it's one thing or another.

Tyndale gloss

or

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἤ (ē) is a particle used to indicate distinction, functioning as a disjunctive 'or' and a comparative 'than.' It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in phrases like 'either...or' and in disjunctive questions. Notably, it can also express comparisons after comparative terms, such as in Matthew 10:15. The entries do not show any significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11);

disjunctive, or;

between single words: Mt 5:17, Mk 6:56, Lk 2:24, Jo 6:19, Ro 1:21, al.;

before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, freq. in interrog. form: Mt 7:4, 9, Mk 12:14, Lk 13:4, Ro 3:29 6:3 9:21, I Co 6:9, 16 9:6, II Co 11:7; ἢ . . . ἤ…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Χριστοῦ (NVWT ΒΗ Targ. Jonath. ad ᾿ς lili. 10), the kingdom of the Messiah, which will be founded by God through the Messiah and over which the Messiah will preside as God’s vicegerent; ἡ Bac. τῶν οὐρανῶν, only in Matthew, but very frequently [some 33 times], the kingdom of heaven, i. e. the kingdom which is of heavenly or divine origin and nature (in rabbin. writ. nown mao is the rule of God, the theocracy viewed universally, not the Messianic kingdom); sometimes simply ἡ βασιλεία : Mt. iv. 23, ete.; Jas. ii. 5; once ἡ Bac. τοῦ Δαυείδ, because it was supposed the Messiah would be one of David’s descendants and a king very like David, Mk. xi. 10; once also ἡ Bac. τοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ θεοῦ, Eph. ν. 5. Relying principally on the prophecies of Daniel — who had declared it to be the purpose of God that, after four vast and mighty kingdoms had succeeded one another and the last of…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἢ μή. The general distinction between οὐ and μή is that οὐ is objective, dealing only with facts, while μή is sudjectize, involving will and thought. But in late Greek μή has encroached very largely upon οὐ, with the result that in the NT οὐ is almost entirely confined to the indicative, while μή monopolizes the other moods (but see I. 5). A few exx. of some of the many uses of μή will make this clear. I. Μή negatives (1) the conjunctive (a) after ἐάν (4v)—P Oxy II. 294%? (A.D. 22) (= Selections, p. 36), where certain men are confined to prison, ἐὰν μή τι πίσωσι τὸν ἀρχιστάτορα δο[ῦν]αι etk(= ἱκ)ανόν, ‘* unless indeed they shall persuade the chief usher to give security,’’ BGU II. 5301” \i/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 61) alav (/. ἐὰν) μὴ ἔλθῃς, κινδυνεύω ἐκστῆvat od ἔχω [κλή]ρου, “if you do not come I run the risk of losing the lot (of land) which I possess ”—a father writes to Selections…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἤ (ē) — or.

ἤ,

Epic dialect also ἠέ (in signification [Refs 4th c.BC+], conjunction with two chief senses, Disj. (or) and comparative (than).

__A DISJUNCTIVE, or, ἐγὼ.. ἢ ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θεόσυτος ἢ βρότειος ἢ κεκραμένη [Refs 4th c.BC+]

__A.2 ἢ.. ἤ either.. or, ἢ νῦν δηθύνοντ᾽ ἢ ὕστερον αὖτις ἰόντα [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.; so ἢ.. ἤτοι.. [Refs 5th c.BC+] is emphasized, later no distinction is implied, [NT+2nd c.BC+]; ἤ repeated any number of times, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι ἢ τεὸν ἢ Αἴαντος ἰὼν γέρας ἢ Ὀδυσῆος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἤ is probably wrongly accented in codices of [Refs 8th c.BC+] adverb [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἤ

e

a primary particle of distinction between two connected terms;

disjunctive, or; comparative, than:--and, but (either), (n-)either,

except it be, (n-)or (else), rather, save, than, that, what, yea.

Often used in connection with other particles. Compare especially

2235, 2260, 2273.

see GREEK for 2235

see GREEK for 2260

see GREEK for 2273

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἤ

Disj.prt.

or, than

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἤ ē 343x

can function as a conj (298x), either, or, Mt. 6:24; after comparatives, and ἄλλος, ἕτερος, expressed or implied, than, Mt. 10:15; 18:8; Acts 17:21; 24:21; intensive after ἀλλά and πρίν, Lk. 12:51; Mt. 1:18; it also serves to point an interrogation, Rom. 3:29

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Particle — Particle
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT PaRTicle, disjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

or: The word is used once for either (1Sa 26:10), and is still in poetic use in this sense; as in, "Without or wave or wind" (Coleridge); "Or the bakke or some bone he breketh in his dzouthe" (Piers Plowman (B), VII, 93; compare Merchant of Venice, III, ii, 65). It is also used with "ever" for before (Ps 90:2; Ecclesiasticus 18:19), which the American Standard Revised Version substitutes in Ec 12:6 (compare 12:1,2); So 6:12; Da 6:24.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

84%or

or84% · 304×than13% · 47×other renderings4% · 13×

364 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial20%object18%subject12%predicate7%verb4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 343 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

σύ

πρόςχείρa handἁμαρτίαa sin

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ὁArticle theκακολογέωI speak evil of,ἤDisj

εἰμίI am, exist

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἀνεκτόςendurable, tolerθεόςGod, a god

αὐτός

πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenβοῦςan ox

ἀδελφόςa brother

ἤDisjὁArticle theἐάνCond

ἤor343×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

μήτηρa motherπόλιςa cityδύο

τίςIrg

πίνωI drink, imbibeεἰμίI am, existλαλέωI speak, say

οὐNeg

οἶδαI know, rememberἀναγινώσκωI readδίδωμιI offer, give

ἐν

φυλακήa watching, guarτίςIrgποῖοςIrg

καίand, even, also, nam

ἰχθύςa fishαἰτέωI ask, request, πρός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἤ · 343× in the New Testament

Matthew 1 Corinthians Luke Acts Mark Romans 2 Corinthians John 1 Peter Galatians James Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἤDisj×τίςIrg×δύο×μήτηρa mother×οἰκίαa house, household×μᾶλλονmore, rather×ἀδελφήa sister×τέκνονa child, descendent, inhabitant×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אוֹor28%H176 · 131 verses אִםconj26%H518 · 123 verses

Counted over the 457 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

τὸνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

ἀριθμὸνarithmos number G706 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine ¶

18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A number refers to a quantity or amount, like a count of people or things. In the Bible, numbers are used to describe crowds, like in Luke 22:3 and Acts 4:4, where many people believed in Jesus.

Amplified meaning

a quantity, a count

Tyndale gloss

number

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀριθμός (*arithmos*) means 'number' and is derived from a root meaning to count. It encompasses a range of meanings, including a fixed quantity, a sum, and even an abstract concept in philosophy. The New Testament references it in several verses, such as Luke 22:3 and Revelation 13:18, where it can denote both specific and indefinite numbers.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀριθμός, -οῦ, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for מִסְפָּר;]

number, a number: Lk 22:3, Jo 6:10, Ac 4:4 5:36 6:7 11:21 16:5, Ro 9:27, Re 5:11 7:4 9:16 13:17, 18 15:2 20:8 (for exx. of mystical use in π., v. MM, s.v.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀριθμός, -ov, ὁ, [fr. Hom. down], a number; a. a fixed and definite number: τὸν ἀριθμὸν πεντακισχίλιοι, in number, Jn. vi. 10, (2 Mace. viii. 16; 3 Mace. v. 2, and often in Grk. writ.; W. 230 (216); [B. 153 (134)]); ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα, Lk. xxii. 3; dp. ἀνθρώπου, a number whose letters indicate a certain man, Rey. xiii. 18. Ὁ. an indefinite number, i. q. a multitude: Acts vi. 7; xi. 21; Rev. xx. 8.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀριθμός. P Petr IT. 1613. (middle 111,..6.) (= Witkowski®, p. 12) ἠκούσαμεν ἀριθμὸν ἔσεσθαι ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αρσινοε[ίω]ν, P Gen I. 1622 (A.D. 207) τοὶ τούτου ἀδελφοὶ ὄντες τὸν ἀριθμὸν πέντε. For the LXX ἀριθμῷ = ‘‘few” in Num 929, Ezek 1216 (Thackeray, Ο. 7. Gram. p. 39), cf. P Oxy IV. 7427 (B.c. 2) (= Witkowski’, p. 128) παράδος δέ τινι τῶν φίλων ἀριθμῳ αὐτάς (sc. δεσμάς), ‘deliver a few of them,” rather than ‘‘deliver them accurately counted” (as Wilcken αὐ. Witkowski). But note the combination in P Oxy X. 1270%6 (A.D. 159) ἀριθμῷ πλήρϊεις : so 20. 127374 (A.D. 260) with ἀριθμοῦ, and 126129 (A.p, 325). Another use appears in BGU IV. 108525 (A.D. 171) where P. M. Meyer restores περὶ τῶν... ἀρι]θμῷ τριάκοντα ἔντυχε τῷ στρατηγῷ] : ἀριθμῷ is ““α kind of rubric ”—‘‘ heading πο. 30,” or the like. ΟΟ15. 266° (iii/B.c). ὑπὲρ τῶν τὸν ἀριθμὸν ἀποδόντων τὸν κύριον, ‘as regards those who had completed…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀριθμός (arithmos) — number.

ἀριθμός [ᾰ],

(ἁρ-[Refs], ὁ, number, first in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πλῆθος ἐς ἀ. the amount in point of number,[Refs 5th c.BC+] 'count the pebbles on the shore', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ γιγνώσκων ψήφων ἀριθμούς, of a blockhead, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. amount, sum, πολὺς ἀ. χρόνου[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. [χρυσίου] a sum of money, [Refs]

3. ἀριθμῷ, absolutely, in certain numbers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]by tale, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

4. item or term in a series, ὁ δεύτερος ἀ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς ἀ. τοῦ σώματος points of the body, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: hence as a mark of completeness, πάντας τοὺς ἀ. περιλαβών[Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοῦ καθήκοντος τοὺς ἀριθμούς the sum total of duty, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀριθμός

arithmos

from 142; a number (as reckoned up):--number.

see GREEK for 142

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀριθμός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a number, total

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀριθμός arithmos 18x

a number, Lk. 22:3; Jn. 6:10; Acts 4:4; Rev. 20:8; 13:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀριθμός *ἄρω number, Lat. numerus, Od., etc.; ἀριθμόν in number, Hdt., attic; ἀριθμὸν ἕξ Hdt.; ἐς τὸν ἀρ. τρισχίλια id. Hdt.; also, ἓν ἀριθμῶι id. Hdt.; so in attic

amount, sum, extent, πολὺς ἀρ. χρόνου Aeschin.; ἀρ. ἀργυρίου a sum of money, Xen.

as mark of station, worth, rank, μετ᾽ ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμῶι among men, Od.; οὐκ ἔχουσιν ἀριθμόν have no account made of them, Eur.; οὐδ᾽ εἰς ἀριθμὸν ἥκεις λόγων you come not into my account, id. Eur.

mere number, quantity, opp. to quality, worth, ἀριθμὸς λόγων a mere set of words, Soph.; so of men, οὐκ ἀρ. ἄλλως not a mere lot, Eur.; so ἀριθμός alone, like Hor.'s nos numerus sumus, Ar.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

num'-ber:

I. NUMBER AND ARITHMETIC

II. NOTATION OF NUMBERS

1. By Words

2. By Signs

3. By Letters

III. NUMBERS IN OLD TESTAMENT HISTORY

IV. ROUND NUMBERS

V. SIGNIFICANT NUMBERS

1. Seven and Its Multiples

(1) Ritual Use of Seven

(2) Historical Use of Seven

(3) Didactic or Literary Use of Seven

(4) Apocalyptic Use of Seven

2. The Number Three

3. The Number Four

4. The Number Ten

5. The Number Twelve

6. Other Significant Numbers

VI. GEMATRIA

LITERATURE

I. Number and Arithmetic.

The system of counting followed by the Hebrews and the Semites generally was the decimal system, which seems to have been suggested by the use of the ten fingers. Hebrew had separate words only for the first nine units and for ten and its multiples. Of the sexagesimal system, which seems to have been introduced into Babylonia by the Sumerians and which, through its development there, has influenced the measurement of time and space in the…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

Like most Oriental nations, it is probable that the Hebrews in their written calculations made use of the letters of the alphabet. That they did so in post-Babylonian times we have conclusive evidence in the Maccabaean coins; and it is highly probable that this was the ease also in earlier times. But though, on the one hand, it is certain that in all existing MSS of the Hebrew text of the Old Testament the numerical expressions are written at length, yet, on the other, the variations in the several versions between themselves and from the Hebrew text, added to the evident inconsistencies in numerical statement between certain passages of that text itself seems to prove that some shorter mode of writing was originally in vogue, liable to be misunderstood, and in fact misunderstood by copyists and translators. These variations appear to have proceeded from the alphabetic method of writing…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Isa 65:11. See GAD 3.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%number

number100% · 19×

19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject50%object22%adverbial17%predicate11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐκεἰμίI am, existἀκούωI hear, listen

γίνομαιI come into being, a

καίand, even, also,

ἀνήρa male human being,

προσκλίνωpartiality

τέDisj

πολύςmuch, many, ofte

θηρίονa wild beast, animal

ὁArticle the

ἀριθμόςnumber18×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ὄνομαname, character,δώδεκαIndecἀνήρa male human bei

αὐτός

μυριάςa myriad, ten thἑξακόσιοιsix hundredὡςas, like as, how

ὡςas, like as, how, wh

πεντακισχίλιοιfive thousandτετρακόσιοιfour hundred

κατά

ἡμέραa day

γάρfor

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of th

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀριθμός · 18× in the New Testament

Revelation Acts John Luke Romans

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ὡςas, like as, how, while, so that×ἀνήρa male human being, a man×μυριάςa myriad, ten thousand×θηρίονa wild beast, animal×πιστεύωI believe, have faith in×ἀκούωI hear, listen×ὄνομαname, character, reputation×ἀριθμόςa number, total×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

מִסְפָּרnumber, tale80%H4557 · 82 verses

Counted over the 102 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 13c. AD 40

τάξει δὲ ἀριθμὸς οἰκεῖον, ἀριθμῶν δὲ φύσεως νόμοις γεννητικώτατος ὁ ἕξ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.77c. AD 75–95

λάρνακα τετράστεγον κατασκευάσας πηχῶν τὸ μῆκος τριακοσίων πεντήκοντα δὲ τὸ πλάτος καὶ τριάκοντα τὸ βάθος, εἰς ταύτην σὺν τῇ μητρὶ τῶν παίδων καὶ ταῖς τούτων γυναιξὶν ἀνέβη, τά τε ἄλλα ὅσα πρὸς τὰς χρείας ἐπικουρήσειν αὐτοῖς ἔμελλεν ἐνθέμενος, ζῷά…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 2.4c. AD 96

ἀγὼν ἦν ὑμῖν ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς ὑπὲρ πάσης τῆς ἀδελφότητος, εἰς τὸ σώζεσθαι μετ̓ ἐλέους καὶ συνειδήσεως τὸν ἀριθμὸν τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 5th c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Diog. 25Philadelphia (?) (Arsinoites)AD 132

ἀπελευθερα … νος χαίρειν ὁμολογῶ ἐσχηκέναι παρὰ σοῦ δάνειον διὰ χειρὸς ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ἑκατὸν ἀριθμοῦ πλήρης τόκων δραχμιαίων ἑκάστης μνᾶς κατὰ μῆνα ἃς καὶ ἀποδώσω σοι σὺν τοῖς τόκοις

P.Fam.Tebt. 31ArsinoitesAD 144

Δεῖος Δωρᾶτος τῶν ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τοῦ Ἀρσεινοείτου Ἡρακλείδῃ τῷ καὶ Οὐαλερίῳ Ἡρακλείδου καὶ ἑτέρῳ Ἡρακλείδῃ τῷ καὶ Οὐαλερίῳ Λυσιμάχου

P.Harr. 1 83Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 213

χαίρειν. ὁμολογοῦμεν διὰ τόδε τὸ χειρόγραφον εἰληφέναι παρὰ σοῦ ἀργυρίου σεβαστοῦ νομίσματος δραχμὰς τετρακοσίας ἀριθμοῦ πλήρης καὶ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας ι γίνονται πυροῦ ἀρτάβαι δέκα , μέτρῳ ὀγδόῳ σοῦ Ἀπολιναρίου,

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

τοῦho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · neuter ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GSN — Article · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁof the19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

ὀνόματοςonoma name G3686 Noun · genitive · singular · neuter ¶

229× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A name refers to a person's character or authority, as in Matthew 10:2 and John 18:10. It represents who someone is or what they are known for. Jesus taught about the importance of a good name and reputation.

Amplified meaning

character, identity

Tyndale gloss

name

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὄνομα (onoma) means 'name' and can refer to the title or reputation of a person or thing. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as indicating authority or character (e.g., Mt 10:41) and is often contrasted with the reality behind the name (e.g., Rev 3:1). The term can also signify a mere name or pretext, as seen in Mk 9:41.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὄνομα, -τος, τό,

[in LXX chiefly for שֵׁם;]

in general, the name by which a person or thing is called: Mt 10:2, Mk 3:16, Lk 1:63, Jo 18:10, al.; ἄνθρωπος (etc.), ᾧ (οὗ) ὄ. (τ. ὄ), sc. ἦν or ἐστίν (Bl., § 30, 3), Mk 14:32, Lk 1:26, 27; with same ellipsis, καὶ τ. ὄ. αὐτοῦ (ὄ. αὐτῷ), Lk 1:5, Jo 1:6, al.; ὀνόματι, seq. nom. prop., Mt 27:32, Mk 5:22, Lk 1:5, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὄνομα, -ros, τό, (NOM [others TNO; see Vaniéek p. 1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name], with prefixed o [but see Curtius § 446]), Sept. for pw, [fr. Hom. down], the name by which a person or a thing is called, and distinguished from others; 1. univ.: of prop. names, Mk. iii. 16; vi. 14; Acts xiii. 8, etc. ; τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ ὀνόματα, Mt. x. 2; Rev. xxi. 14; ἄνθρωπος or ἀνὴρ @ ὄνομα, πόλις ἢ Ov. , Sc. ἦν, named, foll. by the name in the nom. [ef. B. § 129, 20,3]: Lk. i. 26sq.; 11. 25; viii. 41; xxiv. 13,18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11, 1); οὗ [L ᾧ] τὸ ὄνομα, Mk. xiv. 32; καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, ete., Lk. i. 5, 27; ὄνομα αὐτῷ se. ἦν or ἐστίν [B. u.s.], Jn. i.6; ili. 1; xviii. 10; Rey. vi. 8; ὀνόματι, foll. by the name [cf. B. § 129 a. 3; W. 182 (171) ], Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. v. 22; Lk.i. 5; x. 38; xvi. 20; xxiii.50; Actsv. 1,34; vili. 9; ix. 10-12, 33, 86; χ- 1; χὶ; 28,5 Χ- 19., χυ!. ἔν 14.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὄνομα. (1) For ὄνομα, the ame by which a person or thing is called, we may cite: P Magd 24! (B.c. 218) Αἰγυπτία τις, ἧι λέγεται εἶναι ὄνομα Ψενοβάστι[ς, P Lond 854” (i/ii a.p.) (ΞΞ ΠΙ. p. 206, Selections p. 70) τῶν φίλων [ἐ]μ[ῶν τ]ὰ ὀνόματα ἐνεχάραξα τοῖς ἱ[εἸροῖς ἀειμνή (σὺ τως, “1 carved the names of my friends on the sanctuaries for perpetual remembrance ”—a traveller’s letter, and BGU 11. 4232 (i1/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 92) to[t]t [δέ] pov ὄνομα ᾿Αντῶνις Μάξιμος. Deissmann (1.4.3, p. 121) claims the phrase ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα as ‘‘a characteristic documentary formula,” e.g. P Oxy III. 485%! (a.p. 178) ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐπὶ τῶν [τόπων δηλωθήσεται, ““ whose names will be ascertained on the spot” (Edd.), BGU 11. 432-38 (a.p. 190) ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα τῷ βιβλιδίῳ δεδήλωται, “whose names are shown in the little book” (cf. Phil 43). (2) By a usage similar to that of the Heb. Dv’, ὄνομα comes in the NT to…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὄνομα (onoma) — name.

ὄνομα,

Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect ὄνῠμα [Refs]; Laconian dialect *ἔνυμα probably in proper nouns Ἐνυμακρατίδας [Refs]; poetry also (for the sake of meter) οὔνομα (see.below), which appears regularly in codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in other Ionic dialect prose authors (variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+], but is probably not Ionic; Ionic dialect Inscrr. have only ὄνομα, [Refs 8th c.BC+] et saep.:—name of a person or thing, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always of a person, except ἐρέω δέ τοι οὔνομα λαῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ἀρήτη δ᾽ ὄνομ᾽ ἐστὶν ἐπώνυμον [Refs 8th c.BC+] is used absolutely, by name, πόλις ὄ. Καιναί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀνόματι λέγειν by name, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ὄνομα by name, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἀσπάζου τοὺς φίλους κατ᾽ ὄ. each by his name…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὄνομα

onoma

from a presumed derivative of the base of 1097 (compare 3685); a

"name" (literally or figuratively) (authority, character):--called, (+

sur-)name(-d).

see GREEK for 1097

see GREEK for 3685

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὄνομα, ατος, τό

n.n.

name, character, reputation

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὄνομα onoma 231x

a name; the proper name of a person, etc., Mt. 1:23, 25; 10:2; 27:32; a mere name or reputation, Rev. 3:1; in NT a name as the representative of a person, Mt. 6:9; Lk. 6:22; 11:2; the name of the author of a commission, delegated authority, or religious profession, Mt. 7:22; 10:22; 12:21; 18:5, 20; 19:29; 21:9; 28:19; Acts 3:16; 4:7, 12; εἰς ὄνομα, ἐν ὀνόματι, on the score of being possessor of a certain character, Mt. 10:41, 42; Mk.…

Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὄνομα ὄνομα, ατος, τό, Lat. nomen, a name, Hom., etc.:—absol., by name, πόλις ὄνομα Καιναί Xen., etc.; also in dat., πόλις Θάψακος ὀνόματι id. Xen.

ὄν. θεῖναί τινα to give one a name, Od.; but commonly in Mid., ὄν. θέσθαι id. Od., attic; and for Pass., ὄν. κεῖταί τινι Ar., etc.; ὄν. ἔχειν ἀπό τινος Hdt.

ὄνομα καλεῖν τινα to call one by name, Od., attic; so with pass. verbs. ὄν. ὠνομάζετο Ἕλενος Soph.; ὄν. κέκληται δημοκρατία Thuc.

name. fame, Ἰθάκης γε καὶ ἐς Τροίην ὄνομ᾽ ἵκει Od.; τὸ μέγα ὄν. τῶν Ἀθηνῶν Thuc.; ὄνομα or τὸ ὄν. ἔχειν to have a name for a thing (good or bad), 2 opt., Thuc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

nam (shem; onoma; Latin nomen (2 Esdras 4:1); verbs onomazo; Latin nomino (2 Esdras 5:26)): A "name" is that by which a person, place or thing is marked and known. In Scripture, names were generally descriptive of the person, of his position, of some circumstance affecting him, hope entertained concerning him, etc., so that "the name" often came to stand for the person. In Ac 1:15; Re 3:4, onoma stands for "persons"; compare Nu 26:53,55.

I. Old Testament Word and Use.

1. General:

The word for "name" in the Old Testament is shem (also the name of one of the sons of Noah). The etymology is uncertain, although it may be from shamah (obs.), "to set a mark"; shum is the Aramaic form. For the name as descriptive of the person see NAMES.…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Value of a good Pr 22:1; Ec 7:1

→ A new name given to persons who have spiritual adoption Isa 62:2

→ To Abraham Ge 17:5

→ Sarah Ge 17:15

→ Jacob Ge 32:28

→ Paul Ac 13:9

→ Intercessional influence of the name of Jesus, for his people Na 1

→ See JESUS, IN HIS NAME

→ SYMBOLICAL Ho 1:3,4,6,9; 2:1

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(1) Good

1Sa 18:30; Pr 22:1; Ec 7:1; Ac 6:3; 10:22; 16:2; 22:12

2Co 8:18; 3Jo 1:12

(2) Of the Lord, Mighty

Ne 9:5; Ps 113:3; Pr 18:10; Isa 50:10; Mal 1:11

(3) Of the Lord to be Reverenced

Le 22:2; De 28:58;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

81%name

name81% · 187×named13% · 29×names6% · 13×other renderings1% · 2×

231 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial57%object21%subject20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 229 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐνἐπίδιά

ἐν

ἔρχομαιI come, goπᾶςall, the whole, ὕδωρwater

τὶς

δέbut, on the otheἱερεύςa priestἄνθρωποςa man, one of th

αὐτός

ἐπιτίθημιI put, place upoἐκἐπάνωon the top, abov

ὅς

ἀνήρa male human beiἹεροσόλυμαPropΓαλιλαίαGalilee

ὄνομαname229×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατήρfather, Father, θεόςGod, a god

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ἸησοῦςJesusἸωάννηςJohn

ἐγώ

ἐγώὁArticle theλέγωI say, speak

σύ

καίand, even, also,ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, pὅς

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

σῴζωI save, healὡσαννάHebrἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὄνομα · 229× in the New Testament

Acts Revelation Luke John Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews Philippians 1 John James

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

καλέωI call, invite, name×ὑπέρ×ἐπικαλέωI call by an additional name, appeal to×δέχομαιI take, receive, accept, welcome×ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, put out, banish, bring forth,×δώδεκαIndec×βαπτίζωI dip, submerge, baptize×δαιμόνιονan evil-spirit, demon×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

שֵׁםname (√ unknown)82%H8034 · 432 verses

Counted over the 527 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ἀλλ’ ὅ γε μέγας Μωυσῆς ἀλλοτριώτατον τοῦ ὁρατοῦ νομίσας εἶναι τὸ ἀγένητον — πᾶν γὰρ τὸ αἰσθητὸν ἐν γενέσει καὶ μεταβολαῖς οὐδέποτε κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὄν — τῷ μὲν ἀοράτῳ καὶ νοητῷ προσένειμεν ὡς ἀδελφὸν καὶ συγγενὲς ἀιδιότητα, τῷ δ’ αἰσθητῷ γένεσιν οἰκεῖον…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.28c. AD 75–95

καὶ γενομένου τούτου κατανοήσας τὴν ὅλην ὕλην διεχώρισε τό τε φῶς καὶ τὸ σκότος καὶ τῷ μὲν ὄνομα ἔθετο νύκτα, τὸ δὲ ἡμέραν ἐκάλεσεν ἑσπέραν τε καὶ ὄρθρον τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ τὴν ἀνάπαυσιν προσαγορεύσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Grenf. 1 43Thebais201 BC–102 BC

τὸ … κέναι ἡμῖν τὴν ἵππον καὶ παρʼ Ἰουδαίου … σθαι αὐτήν, οὗ τὸ ὄνομα ἀγνοοῦμεν. αὐτοῦ δὲ μηδʼ ἀποδεδωκότος ἡμῖν μηδὲ ἵππον μηδὲ τὴν πορείαν αὐτῆς ἐπιδεδωκότος, ἐγράψαμέν

P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα Εἰρήνην καὶ Ἀμπέλιον

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … · τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα Εἰρήνην καὶ

“and that no one may be able to buy or to sell only except the [one] having the mark — or the name of the beast or the number of the name of it.”

αὐτοῦ.¶autos of it. G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · neuter ¶

5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.

Tyndale gloss

it/s/he

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-GSN — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GSN Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

52%him

him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus

πρός

λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe

ἐν

ὁArticle theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god

αὐτόςof it.5550×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

ἐν

ὁArticle theαὐτόςὅς

εἰς

ὁArticle theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐπερωτάωI interrogate, question, demand of×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

BSB	so that no one could buy or sell unless he had the mark—the name of the beast or the number of its name.
KJV	And that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or the name of the beast, or the number of his name.
ASV	and that no man should be able to buy or to sell, save he that hath the mark, even the name of the beast or the number of his name.
YLT	and that no one may be able to buy, or to sell, except he who is having the mark, or the name of the beast, or the number of his name.
WEB	and that no one would be able to buy or to sell unless he has that mark, which is the name of the beast or the number of his name.
BBE	So that no man might be able to do trade but he who has the mark, even the name of the beast or the number of his name.

Revelation 13:17 — Word Study

Cite / Share This Page

Deep Study — Revelation 13:17

Context — The Mark of the Beastgenerated

Cross References

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 7 references, hung on the phrase they belong to

Nave’s Topical Bible — the subjects this verse is filed under

The Key Word — χάραγμα, charagmagenerated

How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

Sentence Structuregenerated

Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

Reflection Questionsgenerated

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Modern formal

Tyndale line

Strictly literal

From the Latin

Simplified

Word by word, the decisions they made

The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Word by word, across the editions

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

Lexicons — every word in Revelation 13:17

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →